3. To the maximum extent possible, do field welding on the ground.
B. Storage and care of electrodes: At time of use, verify that coatings on electrodes are thoroughly dry.
1. Use electrodes taken from hermetically-sealed packages within 4 hr. of the time the package is opened.
2. Use one of the following methods for drying or reconditioning electrodes that have not been used within the 4-hr. period, or electrodes that have been exposed more than 1 hr. to air having a relative humidity of 75% or more:
a. Dry for a minimum of 2 hr. at a temperature between 300°F and 400°F. b. Store for 24 hr. at a temperature of 200°F to 250°F. c. Recondition in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Immediately remove from job electrodes of all classifications that have been wet. 350
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Preparation: Thoroughly clean paint, scale, and other foreign matter from surfaces to be welded.
1. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and at completion of each pass. Chip entire area of hand-guided and controlled flame-cut edges before welds are deposited thereon.
2. In general, surfaces made by automatic or mechanically guided and controlled welding equipment need not be ground or chipped before welding thereto, but shall be slagged and wire-brushed.
3. Assign welders working on the project an identifying symbol or mark. Each welder shall be required to mark or stamp its symbol on each weldment completed, for identification.
Maintain a report of welders employed, date of qualification, and symbol or identification mark assigned to each.
4. Design items of equipment for welding and oxygen cutting such as to enable qualified welders and welding operators to follow procedures and attain results prescribed in AWS D1.1.
D. Characteristics of welds: After depositing welds, slag and brush with wire brushes and verify that welds exhibit uniform section, smoothness of weld metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlaps, and freedom from porosity clinkers. Use only AWS prequalified weld details.
1. Visually inspect edges and ends of fillet welds to verify good fusion and penetration into base metal.
2. Provide sizes and lengths of welds not less than those specified by design requirements and detailed drawings, nor substantially in excess of those requirements, without Owner's approval. Do not change location of welds without Owner's approval. Weld lengths indicated on Drawings are new, full-section welds, and do not include starts and stops.
3. Weld surfaces smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears, or other defects which would adversely affect quality or strength of weld. Provide surfaces free from loose or thick scale, slag, rust, or other foreign material that will prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes. Mill scale that withstands vigorous wire brushing, a light film of drying oil, or a thin rust-inhibitive coating may remain.
4. Grind flush all butt welds on exterior exposed surfaces, unless indicated otherwise.
E. Verify that all groove, butt, and tee welds indicated are full penetration. Provide run-off tabs, remove at completion, and grind flush.
F. During assembly and welding, maintain component parts of a built-up member in close contact.
1. During welding, take precautions to minimize "lock-up" stress and distortion due to heat and weld shrinkage.
2. Do not weld in a windy location until adequate wind protection has been provided.
3. Minimize welding as much as practical to allow proper aligning of subsequent installed members.
4. Do not weld members until connection is bolted in close contact and/or adjusted to dimensions indicated on Drawings, with allowances for weld shrinkage.
5. Same quality requirements apply to tack welds as to final welds.
3.4 GROUTING OF BASES AND PLATES
A. Maintain bases and bearing plates in proper position while being grouted. Use only high-strength, non-shrink grout specified, or epoxy grout as specified in this section.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Requirements.
B. See also General Structural Notes for required field tests.
END OF SECTION 05 1200
351
METAL DECKING 05 3000 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 05 3000 – METAL DECKING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section describes materials and installation of metal roof decking.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Structural Steel, Aluminum, and Miscellaneous Metalwork, Section 05 1200.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 3300.
B. Submit complete manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions in advance of fabrication. Include manufacturer’s certification showing compliance with these specifications.
Indicate on transmittal form to OWNER that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the installer.
C. Submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of roof deck panels, anchorage details, and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing, or other accessories.
D. Submit current International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) approval for deck diaphragm shear values for deck welds.
E. Fabrication: Prior to erection of metal decking, deliver to the OWNER a letter signed by an official of the manufacturer’s firm certifying that the metal decking delivered for this work was fabricated in accordance with these specifications.
F. Erection: Upon completion of erection, deliver to the OWNER a letter signed by an official of the erector’s firm certifying that metal decking installed in this work was installed in accordance with these specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with the current editions of codes and regulations including current editions or revisions and supplements of the following reference standards: ICBO.
AISI “Specification for the Design of Cold – Formed Steel Structural Members.” AWS “Code for the Welding in Building Construction.” SDI “Steel Roof Deck Design Manual.” B. Performance Requirements:
1. Compute the properties of metal floor deck sections on the basis of the effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI specifications. Provide not less than the specified deck section properties shown including section modules and moment of inertia per foot of width.
2. Allowable Deflection: Design and fabricate deck for a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the clear span under the total uniform dead and live load.
3. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist a gross uplift loading of 30 psf (less dead load for roof areas).
C. Qualifications of Suppliers and Personnel: The erector shall have at least five years’ continuous experience in the erection of metal decking.
D. Qualifications of Welding:
1. Quality welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS B3.0 “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification.”
2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. If any welds are found defective, the Contractor shall be responsible 352
METAL DECKING 05 3000 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
for the expense of testing and removal and replacing that portion of decking to the satisfaction of the OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Form metal roof decking from steel conforming to ASTM A446, Grade A.
B. Metal roof decking shall conform to the following properties:
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Form deck units in lengths to span three or more support spacing with flush, telescoped, or nested 2-inch end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise shown or specified. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI “Basic Design Specifications.” B. Fabricate metal closure strips of painted sheet steel of the same quality as the deck units: not less than nominal 0.0359 inch (20 gauge) thick before coating. Form to the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking.
C. Provide decking accessories, including welding washers, anchor washes with ear clips, closures, and filler strips. Provide closure plates and other attachments at openings through decking for ducts, shafts, and other penetrations. Where decking changes directions, and at perimeter, closures shall be of 18-gauge steel unless otherwise indicated.
D. Reinforce decking at openings per manufacturer’s requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. When delivered to the jobsite, store the metal decking off the ground and cover to protect material from the elements. Slope to permit drainage.
B. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements. Replacements and repairs shall be at Contractor’s expense.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL ROOF DECKING
A. Place metal roof decking with edges up and flutes at right angles to supports. End laps shall always occur over supports, with a minimum end lap of 2 inches for welded attachment. Begin at corner of buildings to maintain alignment. Lap sheets one-half flute at side laps. Attach sheets to top chord of supports by plug welding through special welding washers. Fasten each end lap in the trough of the flutes at each corner (through four thicknesses of metal) and at center of end lap.
Limit the spacing between adjacent points of attachment to 18 inches maximum over all supports.
Attach placed sheets at the end of the workday. Metal connections shall be as indicated on plans.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Roof decking shall be painted in the factory per Division 09.
B. For touch-up on decking, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
1. Gauge: 20
2. Moment of Inertia: 0.231 in^4
3. Section Modulus + 0.230 in^3
-0.237 in^3
4. Weight per Square Foot: 2.8 (lb)
5. Depth of Corrugations 1-1/2 inches
353
METAL DECKING 05 3000 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.
B. Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.
C. Do not use calcium chlorides or admixtures containing chloride salts in the concrete fill over the deck.
END OF SECTION 05 3000
354
STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 05 4100 – STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all light gauge framing for interior wall framing, canopy joists, ceiling joists and bracing in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM C754 insofar as any portion is applicable, is hereby made a part of this Specification as though repeated herein. In case of conflicts, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal studs shall be roll formed channel type studs, unless otherwise noted 25-gauge electrogalvanized steel, sizes indicated, conforming to ASTM C545 and the Metal Stud Manufacturer’s Association. Use 20-gauge for walls to receive ceramic tile, for walls over 14 feet high, and at jambs of door openings 36 inches wide or wider.
B. Provide metal floor and ceiling runners designed to accommodate the specified studs.
C. Metal furring channels for walls shall be 25-gauge electrogalvanized steel, conforming to ASTM C545.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 2-inch from each end and spaced 24-inch o.c. or to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts spaced 16-inch o.c.
B. Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners and spaced 16-inch o.c. When necessary, splice studs with 8-inch nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls and a possibility of water penetration through walls exists, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall surfaces.
C. Anchor all studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges with screws (crimping is not acceptable). Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor slips of door or borrowed light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed light frames place cut to length section of runner with a web flanged bend at each end horizontally, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut to length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.
D. At all door openings 36 inches in width, install double studs at both jambs, install additional stud back to back of stud at door jamb. Securely anchor by welding studs to each other.
E. At partition corners, install a stud so that it forms the outside corner. Following application of a single layer of wallboard to this stud. Install a second stud in the abutting runner and screw attach the web through the wallboard into the flange of the first stud. A 3-stud conventional corner is an acceptable alternative.
F. Bridge stud partitions at mid-height, with 1½-inch channels through studs secured in place. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together.
G. Provide all braced framing of steel stud framing as detailed. Use only mechanical attachments.
H. Provide all canopy and ceiling joists installed in accordance with the Drawings. 355
STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 4100 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
I. Provide all blocking as required for the installation of bathroom, lab, office fixtures and accessories.
END OF SECTION 05 4100
356
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 05 5000 – METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, bolts, fasteners, equipment, and service necessary for fabrication and erection of structural steel and aluminum and for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous nonferrous metals in accordance with the Contract Documents and not specifically included under other Sections of these Specifications.
1. Erection
2. Shop and Erection Drawings
3. Shop Painting
4. Galvanizing
5. Aluminum Work Protection
6. Cleaning Aluminum Work
7. Miscellaneous Items
8. Loose Lintels
9. Sleeves and Inserts
10. Aluminum Pipe Railing
11. Plate Covers and Frames
12. Guard Chains
13. Lifting Hooks
14. Cast Iron Wheel Guard
15. Cast Aluminum Nosings
16. Floor Hatches and Frames
17. Access Doors
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All work under this Section shall be governed by:
1. Specifications for the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel for buildings – American Institute of Steel Construction, current edition.
2. Aluminum Construction Manual, Section 1, Specifications for Aluminum Structures – The Aluminum Association.
3. All welding shall conform to the latest code of the American Welding Society.
4. ANSI B94.12
5. ASTM A12, A153, A384, A593 and A780
6. ASTM A48
7. ASTM A276
8. ASTM A325
9. ASTM F593, 294
10. Federal Specification FF-S-325
11. Federal Specification TT-V-51F
12. SSPC SP-1, SP-2, SP3, SP-7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures. 357
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. As required by the Specifications, submit for review completely detailed and certified shop and erection drawings of the miscellaneous metal work. All Coatings or other protection against corrosion to be applied at the shop or in the field shall be indicated on these drawings. The shop drawings for aluminum work shall show the alloys and tempers to be used, and the finish, if any to be applied.
C. Shop drawings, giving complete information necessary for fabrication, layout and installation of metal work shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to fabrication.
D. Preparation of shop drawings for fabricated metal items shall be coordinated with the manufacturers, of various equipment in order to comply with details, locations, openings, and arrangements required by the manufacturers, of various equipment in order to comply with details, locations, openings, and arrangements, required by the manufacturers.
E. Field measurements shall be made to verify all dimensions in the field, which may affect installation of work before shop drawings are made and/or fabrication is performed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The design, detail and workmanship of steel plates and structural steel shall conform to the AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
B. Where welding is permitted or required, it shall conform to the current requirements of the American Welding Society for the type of work in question.
C. Aluminum work shall be fabricated in a shop where the quality of work is in accordance with the highest standards for work of this type. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in the fabrication of aluminum, and shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, fitted with proper joints and intersections and with finishes as specified.
D. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles.
Shearing and punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The general design and dimensions of the miscellaneous metal work are indicated on the Drawings, correctness of the details and dimensions of the finished articles is required. Verification of conditions at the job before fabrication and coordination of the work with that of all other trades to prevent interference.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel plated and structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM Standard Specification for Structural Steel, Designation A36.
B. Sheet steel shall be cold rolled or hot rolled carbon sheet steel conforming to ASTM Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality, Designation A36 or AST ASTM Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum, percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality, Designation A569, as appropriate.
C. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless, Designation A53.
D. Stainless steel shall be Type 304 unless otherwise indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. 358
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Aluminum work shall be fabricated of plates, rolled, or extruded shapes, sheets or casting conforming (unless otherwise permitted or indicated) to the following alloy and temper designations of the Aluminum Association:
1. Structural rolled or extruded Shapes 6061-T6
2. Extruded shapes 6061-T6
3. Plates 6061-T6
4. Gratings (bearing bars) 6061-T (crimp bars) 6063-T6
5. Castings 214
6. Sheets 3003-F
7. Bolts and nuts 2024-T4
8. Pipe Railing 6063-T6
2.2 STEEL
A. Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36. Structural tubing, where used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A500, Grade B, and the ends of the tubing shall be properly sealed to protect the internal surfaces. Steel anchor bolts shall be ASTM A36 hot rolled threaded rod or bar stock, except where stainless steel is indicated on the Drawings.
B. Structural steel members as required shall conform to ASTM Standard shapes.
C. Base and bearing plates shall be provided where necessary to provide maximum bearing value of not more than 200 psi on solid concrete masonry units not more than 750 psi on concrete and shall be grouted in place.
D. Steel lintels shall be provided for all square head openings in masonry where shown and where other lintels are not indicated on the Drawings. Lengths of bearing at each end of lintels shall be not less than 1 inch per foot of span, but in no case less than 8 inches shall be increased or the lintels shall be fitted with bearing plates as required to provide unit pressures in pounds per square inch of not more than 200 on solid concrete masonry units and 625 on concrete. All new steel lintels shall be shop primed and ready to receive coatings as specified under Division 09
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. Painting of miscellaneous ferrous metal work is specified under Section 09 9600 – Special Coatings.
2.4 GALVANIZING
A. Items of miscellaneous iron work and steel work indicated on the Drawings or specified to be galvanized shall be zinc coated by the hot dip process in conformity with ASTM Standard Specification for Zinc (hot galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip, Designation A123-78; or ASTM Standard Specifications for Zinc Coating (hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, Designation A153-78, as appropriate. Galvanizing is specified under Article 3.04, "Hot-Dip Galvanizing."
2.5 ALUMINUM
A. All structural and miscellaneous aluminum shall be Alloy 6061 (Alloy 6063 for extrusions), Temper T6, unless otherwise noted, indicated, or accepted by the OWNER. Where welding is necessary in fabrication, is shall be done in conformance with Section 7 "Welded Construction" of Specification for Aluminum Structures, referenced hereinbefore. 359
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.6 ALUMINUM WORK PROTECTION
A. Aluminum surfaces which after erection would otherwise be in contact with concrete or brick masonry or with mortar, shall be protected from contact therewith by a coat of bitumastic super service black manufactured by the Koppers Company, Inc. Pittsburgh, PA; Tarmastic 100 manufactured by Porter Coating Division, Porter Paint Company, North Kansas City, MO; or ENGINEER-approved equal. Areas where the paint has been damaged by abrasion or other cause shall be cleaned and repainted as directed so that the aluminum will have a complete protective paint film when brought into contact with the material against which it is being protected. Before application of coating, the surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, heavy deposits of grease or oil and other foreign substances and shall be immersed in or swabbed with an acceptable solvent. Next the surfaces shall be rinsed with clear water and thoroughly dried.
B. Attention of the Specifications in regard to protection against electrolysis where aluminum is to be used in conjunction with dissimilar metals is required.
C. Where a shop coating of methacrylate lacquer has been specified on aluminum work to protect the surface from stain, the protective coating of lacquer worn off during handling or erection shall be replaced in the field by a new coating of lacquer of the same type.
D. During construction, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the aluminum work from splashing or the accumulation of paint, concrete, mortar, or other similar materials.
2.7 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Stainless steel shapes shall be ANSI Type 304 or 316 in accordance with ASTM A276.
Miscellaneous bar stock products such as pipe straps shall be 300 Series stainless steel. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be ANSI Series 300 stainless steel.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
1. Structural bolts shall be ANSI Type 300 Series stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593, with ASTM F594 nuts. All bolts shall have hexagonal heads.
2. Anchors and bolts including nuts and washers shall be provided where necessary for securing the work in place. Sizes, types and spacings of anchors and bolts not indicated or specified otherwise shall be as necessary for their purposes. Anchor bolts and anchors for the erection of structural steel shall be shall be stainless steel Type 316.
3. Bolts and nuts shall be installed with anti-seize per Loctite, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
B. Expansion Anchors (In Concrete):
1. Expansion anchors shall be of three (3) types:
a. Stainless steel wedge type.
b. Self-drilling plated type with stainless steel bolt and stainless steel washer. c. Type of expansion anchor desired shall be noted on Drawings.
2. Stainless steel wedge type anchors shall be ITW Ramset/Red Head or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal of Type 316 stainless steel. Anchors shall meet or exceed latest Government GSA Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Anchor shall be used with 300 series stainless steel bolt and washer.
3. Self-drilling plated anchors shall be ITW Ramset/Red Head of DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal. Anchors shall meet or exceed latest Government GSA Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group III, Type 1. Self-drilling anchors shall be electro-deposited zinc plated and chromate dipped, to meet or exceed the requirements of the latest Federal Specification QQZ-325, Type II, Class 3. Cutting teeth shall have minimum hardness of 82 Rockwell A scale.
4. Steel expansion anchors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
360
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Self-drilling expansion anchors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. To insure full development strength, all self-drilling expansion anchors shall be expanded over the plug in the final set, by using a bolt screwed into the female threads and impacted by hand with a suitable hammer. The final set shall not be accomplished by using the drilling tool.
6. After installation, pull-out tests by the anchor manufacturer's representative may be requested by the DESIGN/BUILDER. If so, the DESIGN/BUILDER will specify the number and location of the tests.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Items of miscellaneous metal work not particularly specified hereinafter shall be of the shape, size, materials, and details indicated on the Drawings or suitable for the purpose intended.
2.10 LOOSE LINTELS
A. Furnish all loose lintels as indicated on the Drawings or required by the Work. The loose lintels shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates. All loose lintels shall be shop primed and ready to receive coatings as specified under Division 09.
2.11 SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the Specifications regarding sleeves and inserts.
2.12 ALUMINUM PIPE RAILING
A. Reference Section 05 5213.
B. The aluminum pipe railing shall be the product of company normally engaged in the manufacture of pipe railing. Railing shall be shop assembled in lengths not to exceed 24 feet for field erection.
C. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200-pound concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 50 pounds per foot applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200-pound load will not be applied simultaneously with the 50-pounds-per-foot load. In addition, the handrails shall be designed to withstand a load of 100 pounds per foot horizontal load. The 100-pounds-perfoot vertical load does not apply to stair rails.
D. The manufacturer shall submit calculations to the DESIGN/BUILDER for approval. Testing of base castings or base extrusions by an independent lab or manufacturer’s lab (if manufacturer’s lab meets the requirements of the Aluminum Association) will be an acceptable substitute for calculations. Calculations will be required for approval of all other design aspects.
E. Post spacing shall be a maximum of 8 feet 0 inches, unless noted otherwise. Posts and railings shall be a minimum of 1½ inches Schedule 40 aluminum pipe alloy 6063-T6, ASTM B429 or ASTM B221. The handrail manufacturer shall show that their posts are of adequate strength, the manufacturer may reduce the post spacing or add reinforcing dowels or may do both in order to meeting loading requirements.
F. The handrail shall be made of pipes joined together with component fittings. Samples of all components, bases, toe plate and pipe must be submitted for approval. Components that are glued at the joints will not be acceptable. Handrail and components hall be Kee Clamp, Inc., Golden Railings, Speed-Rail, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
G. Posts shall not interrupt the continuation of the top rail at any point along the railing, including corners and end terminators.
H. The midrail at a corner return shall be able to withstand a 200-pound load without loosening.
I. Expansion bolts shall be spaced 10 diameters apart and 5-diameter edge distance for no reduction in pullout strength. A safety factor of four shall be used on expansion bolt pullout values published by the manufacturer.
361
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
J. Toe plate shall conform to OSHA Standards. Toe plate shall be a minimum of 4 inches high and shall be an extrusion that attaches to the posts with clamps, which allow for expansions and contraction between posts. Toe plates shall be set ¼-inch above the walking surface. Toe plates shall be provided on handrails as required by OSHA and/or as shown on Drawings. Toe plates shall be shipped loose in stock lengths with pre-manufactured corners for field installation.
K. Openings in the railing shall be guarded by a self-closing gate. Safety chains shall not be used unless specifically shown on the Drawings.
L. Finish shall be Aluminum Association M10-C22-A41 (215-R1). The pipe shall be plastic wrapped.
The plastic wrap is to be removed after erection.
M. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, grout or dissimilar metals will be protected with a coat of bituminous paint, (two (2) coats of Federal Specification TT-V51F Asphalt Varnish), mylar isolators, or other approved material.
2.13 PLATE COVERS AND FRAMES
A. The plate covers and frames shall be the sizes indicated on the Drawings. The frames shall be aluminum angles of the sizes indicated with welded strap anchors for securing the frames in the concrete. The frames shall have mitered corners with welded joints ground smooth where exposed.
B. The covers shall be ¼-inch thick aluminum tread plate having an acceptable nonskid surface and reinforced with aluminum bars welded to the underside of the cover in accordance with the details.
Plate covers shall be capable of supporting a uniform superimposed load of 100 psf for the span with a deflection of less than ¼-inch based on allowable fiber stress of 16,000 psi. The covers shall be made to fit neatly and accurately in the frames.
C. Hinged covers shall be furnished with heavy-duty stainless steel, plain bearing hinges with stainless steel pins. The hinges shall be fastened to the covers and frames with stainless steel machine screws. The hinged covers shall be provided with flush lift handles fabricated from ½-inch diameter aluminum rod, alloy 6061-T6511.
D. A single leaf of hinged plate covers shall be no greater than 3 feet x 5 feet in size.
E. Removable plate covers shall have 1-inch diameters finger holes to facilitate removal. All edges of holes cut in the plate covers shall be ground smooth.
F. Removable plate covers shall be no greater than 14 square feet in size with the longer dimension no greater than 7 feet.
G. Gasket plate covers shall have continuous compressible neoprene seals between the cover and the frame at the perimeter. The covers shall be secured to the frames with countersunk, flathead, stainless steel machine screws spaced approximately 6 inches on centers.
2.14 GUARD CHAINS
A. Removable guard chains at openings in aluminum pipe railings shall be fabricated from wrought, non-welded aluminum chain having 12 links per foot. The chains shall be secured to aluminum eyes bolted or welded to pipe stanchion at one end of the opening. The free ends of the chains shall be provided with hooks formed from ¼-inch diameter solid aluminum rod for attaching to similar eyes in the pipe stanchion at the opposite end of the opening.
2.15 CAST IRON WHEEL GUARDS
A. Wheel guards where indicated on the Drawings shall be cast iron guards of the sizes and types indicated on the Drawings as herein specified and shall be manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Neenah, WI; Flockhart Foundry Company, Neward, NJ; McKinley Iron Work, Fort Worth, TX or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal. Wheel guards shall be given one shop coat of rust inhibitive paint before shipment.
362
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Wheel guards shall be heavy-duty concrete fill type, cast iron wheel guards, No., R-4983-C manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company Type 706A manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal. The guards shall be set 2 inches into the pavement and shall be bolted to the masonry walls. The guards shall be filled with Class A concrete and the tope of the fill sloped at a 15-degree angle from the building.
2.16 CAST ALUMINUM NOSINGS
A. The cast aluminum nosing shall be abrasive cast aluminum nosing securely fastened with stainless steel, flat head bolts and wing anchors set into the fresh concrete. The nosings shall be the products of Wooster Products, Inc., Wooster, OH; American Abrasive Metals Company, Irvington, NJ; Andco Building Specialties or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal.
2.17 FLOOR HATCHES AND FRAMES (See also 05 5300)
A. The floor hatches and frames shall be flush floor hatches provided by manufacturer as shown in the Drawings or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal. Where noted and in areas subject to vehicle traffic, the hatches shall be H-20 rated. The hatches shall be double or single leaf type and of the sizes indicated on the Drawings. The hatches shall be factory assembled and shipped complete with frame for installation on the job. The hatches shall be furnished with hinges, hold open safety lock bars, and flush lift handles. Gutter type hatches shall have a 1½-inch drainage coupling located in on corner of the channel frame.
B. The floor hatches and frames shall be fabricated from aluminum with ¼-inch extruded aluminum frames and 1/40-inch diamond checkered aluminum plate covers. The covers shall be reinforced to be capable of withstanding a uniform live load of 300 psf (min.).
2.18 ACCESS DOORS
A. Doors shall be flush panel access doors as manufactured Inryco, Inc., Milwaukee, WI; Karp Associates, Inc., Maspeth, NY; BOICO, Birmingham, AL or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal.
Doors and frames to be steel with concealed hinge and flush screwdriver operated locks.
2.19 CASTINGS
A. All miscellaneous iron castings shall be of best quality materials free from flaws and unsightly defects. Gray cast iron shall be ASTM A48 Class 35 (35,000 psi tensile strength). Furnish and install in the locations indicated casting of the type and size shown on the Drawings.
2.20 CARPENTERS IRON WORK
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for head and nuts which bear on wood structural connections, elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.21 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports as required to complete the work. Fabricate miscellaneous units to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown or if not shown, of the required dimensions to receive adjacent grating plates, louvers, vents, grilles, screens, or other work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and a minimum number of joints for filed connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the work.
363
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 ANCHORAGE ITEMS
A. Furnish all bolts, nuts, shims, pins, screws, nails, and other anchors, which, may be required by the Drawings or job conditions to secure all items permanently in place whether or not specifically called for or shown on the Drawings.
3.2 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF METAL WORK
A. General: All metal items shall be accurately fabricated and erected with exposed joints close fitting.
All joints shall be such of character and so assemble that they will be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Joints shall be located where least conspicuous. Items shall have smooth finished surfaces except where otherwise shown or specified.
B. Built-In Items: Members or parts to be built-in with masonry or concrete shall be in a form affording a suitable anchorage or shall be provided with approved anchors, expansion shields or other approved means of securing members.
C. Dissimilar Metals: Ferrous and non-ferrous metals shall be insulated at all contacts with felt washer, mylar strips or sheets, bitumastic paints, or other acceptable means. All aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete shall be coated with two (2) coats of Federal Specification TT-V51F Asphalt Varnish or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal.
D. Connections:
1. All required anchors, couplings, bolts, and nuts required to support miscellaneous metalwork should be furnished and installed as required.
2. Weights of connections and accessories shall be adequate to safely sustain and withstand stresses and strains to which they will be normally subjected.
3. Connections shall be bolted except where welding is called for in the Drawings. Bolts shall be ¾ inch diameter unless noted or required otherwise.
E. Expansions Anchors:
1. Expansions anchors shall be installed in holes drilled into concrete with carbide tipped drill bits conforming to ANSI B94.12-1977, using a rotary impact hammer for ½-inch and 3/8- inch anchors. Hole depth shall equal or exceed the anchor manufacturer’s minimum recommended embedment. Should hole depth equal anchor manufacturer’s minimum recommended embedment, hole shall be cleaned out by air pressure. The minimum hole depth shall be per anchor manufacturer’s recommendations. Assure hole is perpendicular and conforms in size to anchor manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Washer and nut shall be assembled on anchor so that the top of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. Then the anchor shall be driven into the hole through the work until the washer bears against the work. The anchor shall be expanded in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. General: Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
4. Bolts and Buts: Regular hexagon head type, stainless steel, Grade A (within tankage)
5. Lag Bolts: Stainless steel (within tankage)
6. Machine Screws: Stainless steel
7. Wood Screws: Stainless steel
8. Plain Washers: Stainless steel
9. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Stainless steel
10. Toggle Bolts: Stainless steel (within tankage)
11. Lock Washers: Stainless steel
12. Bolts, buts, lags, toggle bolts and lock washers above and exterior to tankage shall be stainless steel
364
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.3 WELDING
A. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators, both for shop and field welding, shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 “Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society. Manufacturer’s and fabricator’s shop drawings shall clearly show complete information and all field welding shall be performed in conformance with this information regarding location, type, size and length of all weld, all in accordance with AWS A2.0 “Standard Welding Symbols” of the American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes and details.
3.4 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A. All fabrication, galvanizing and repair shall comply with ASTM Standards as they apply in accordance with the publication “ASTM Standard for Materials Hot-Dip Galvanized after Fabrication, 1981” issued by American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc. In particular, the following specific standards shall apply to work under this contract: ASTM A123, A153, A384, A385, A563 and A780.
B. Items to be galvanized shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A385-80.
C. Galvanizing for fabricated steel items, shall conform to ASTM A123-78 and shall be done after fabrication. Steel assemblies shall be subject to safeguarding from warpage and distortion during galvanizing per ASTM A384-76.
Upon field erection, any damage measuring more than 1/10-inch wide shall be repaired with a zincbased solder or zinc-rich paint in accordance with ASTM A780-80. Marred, damaged, or uncoated areas 4-square inches and less shall be patched with a zinc-based solder to a thickness of 5- milligrams; areas greater than 4-square inches shall be patched with an organic zinc-rich paint to a dry film, Devcon Z, LPS Instant Cold Galvanized or DESIGN/BUILDER approved equal. The resident project representative shall determine the extent of damage, which would require recoating.
D. Items subject to distortion during transit, such as thin, curved members, etc., shall be stacked on edge and/or blocked to prevent radius change or other distortion while in transit to and from the galvanizing plant
3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of miscellaneous ferrous metal work is specified under Division 09 - Finishes.
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Rough Hardware:
1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structure. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 05 - Metals.
2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts, which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Trim:
1. Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
2. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated.
END OF SECTION 05 5000
365
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install handrails in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections: Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Golden Railings, Inc., or equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S, Schedule 40 unless otherwise noted.
C. Tubing: Cold formed shapes per ASTM A500 or hot-formed shapes per ASTM A501. Wall thickness for either category shall be in accordance with the thickness and tolerances specified in ASTM A501.
D. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, with hexagon heads or nuts where exposed in the finish work, with flat heads for countersinking where flush bolting is specified or required.
E. Plastic Cover, where indicated: Polyethylene Thermoplastic (HDPE) tubes having ultra-violet resistance and anti-static properties, nominal thickness 0.250 inches. Color shall be OSHA yellow unless otherwise noted. Size covers for pipe diameters.
F. Grout: Non-shrink, nonmetallic type per CE CRD-621 and ASTM C1107. Grout shall be premixed and factory-packaged. Formulation shall be non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous properties.
Provide grout as recommended by grout manufacturer for interior or exterior application.
G. Anchor Bolts:
1. Expansion Anchors: Threaded stud type with two independent expansion anchor wedges per Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 for concrete expansion anchors. Stud, wedges, washer and nut shall be zinc-plated steel.
2. Adhesive Anchor System: Self-contained glass vial containing pre-measured amounts of quartz sand, hardening agent and polyester resin. Studs shall be threaded rod conforming to ASTM A307 with compatible washers and hexagon nuts furnished by the anchor manufacturer.
H. Concrete: Provide 3,000 psi, 28-day strength concrete unless noted otherwise. ASTM C94, slump of 4 inches ± 1 percent.
1. Exterior Concrete: Include air-entrainment or 6 percent ± 1 percent.
2. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1.
3. Aggregates: ASTM C33 normal weight, natural coarse aggregate, maximum ¾” diameter.
4. Water: Potable
2.3 HAND RAIL SYSTEM
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding the following structural loads based on 2018 International Building Code, without exceeding allowable design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings anchors, and connections:
366
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1. Top Rail of Guards and hand rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads as indicated a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft: (730 N/m) applied in any direction at the top and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Intermediate rails, balusters, and filler panels: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:
a. Applied normal load of 50 pounds (0.22kN) on an area not to exceed 1 square foot including openings and space between rails.
b. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed with the proceeding section.
B. Provide Handrail system complying with the following requirements
1. Sleek system with internal connectors.
a. Rails and Posts
1) Extruded Aluminum Pipe ASTM B429, Aluminum alloy 6061-T6. Finish AA M10C22A41. Posts – 1 ½ inch IPS Schedule 80. Rails – 1 ½ inch IPS Schedule 40.
2) Steel pipe scheduled 40. Posts and rails 1 ¼ inch, with high-density polyethylene thermoplastic coating, nominally 0.125 inch thick. b. Mechanical Connectors
1) Post and handrail connector fittings
2) Machined from solid aluminum bar stock of alloy 6063-T6 (ASTM B221) or austenitic stainless steel bar stock of alloy 303 (ASTM A582) or machined castings of high tensile aluminum-magnesium alloy 535.0 (ASTM B26) or castings from high purity ingot 535.2 (ASTM B179) 3) Anodize finish 0.7 mil minimum thickness.
4) Design – Fittings shall be the type which fastens externally with anodized aluminum, tubular rivet nut with socket head cap screw and stainless steel lock washer. Internal connections by means of an internal double tang, expanded by an internal/external, reverse knurl, cup point, hexagon socket set screw.
c. Flanges
1) Sand cast from high tensile aluminum-magnesium alloy 535.0 2) Supplied with anodize finish.7mil minimum thickness. 3) Design – Fittings shall be the type, which fastens directly to the pipe by means of an internal/external, reverse knurl, cup point, hexagon socket set screw.
4) All anchoring hardware shall be 300 series stainless steel. d. Fasteners
1) All fasteners to be 302 or 304 stainless steel.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Options
1. Core
2. Base Mount
END OF SECTION 05 5213
367
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1616 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 07 1616 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cement-based, crystalline waterproofing system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing cement-based, crystalline waterproofing system materials.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Hey’DI K-11, Euclid Chemical Company
2. or Approved Equal
B. Waterproofing System: provide a breathable, two-part, polymer-modified, cement-based system for waterproofing concrete and masonry. Product shall have a texture and consistency similar to concrete and may be brush or spray applied. The waterproofing product shall become an integral part of the wall and waterproofs the negative or positive side through a crystallization process. If required, a bonding agent shall be used to improve adhesion, flexibility and the permeability resistance of the system.
C. Technical Information:
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. The surface must be structurally sound, clean and free of dirt, oil and other contaminants including curing compounds, form release agents, old coatings, paint and efflorescence. New concrete and masonry must be cured a minimum of 7 days. All concrete laitance must also be removed. Provide an absorptive surface on all substrates including precast and formed concrete. The surface must have an open capillary system for adhesion and for optimum crystalline growth. Remove form marks and other protrusions. Concrete honeycombs, cavities, joints, cracks, voids, tie holes and other defects must be opened and routed to sound material. Follow the recommended methods for repairing defects as suggested below. No active water leaks should be present at the time of application of the waterproofing produce.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and cure waterproofing materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 1616
368
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, over roof sheathing, and exterior wall.
B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Field-applied termiticide for concrete slabs and foundations.
B. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Masonry walls enclosing insulation.
C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
D. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
B. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
C. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2013.
D. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.
E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014.
F. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
G. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014.
H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
I. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
J. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012.
K. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2011.
L. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007.
M. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.
369
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.
B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Expanded polystyrene board.
C. Insulation inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene board.
D. Insulation inside Prefabricated Wall Panels: Extruded polystyrene board.
E. Insulation over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene board.
F. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Fiber board.
G. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.
H. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
I. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
J. Insulation above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
K. Insulation over Roof Deck: Polyisocyanurate board.
2.2 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XI; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
5. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum.
8. Board Density: 0.7 lb/cu ft.
9. Compressive Resistance: 5 psi.
10. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 3.1 per 1 inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature.
11. Manufacturers:
a. AFM Corp
b. Diversifoam Products
c. or equal
B. Termite-Resistant Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
4. Board Thickness: 2-1/2 inches.
370
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 11, for overall thickness indicated.
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Nisus Corporation; Bora Foam
b. or equal
C. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XII; extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
5. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 4.6 per 1 inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature.
8. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi.
9. Board Density: 1.20 lb/cu ft.
10. Water Absorption: 0.3 percent by volume, maximum.
11. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co.
b. Pactiv Building Products.
c. or equal
D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Compressive Strength: 16 psi
5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
6. Board Thickness: 1 inch.
7. Board Edges: Square.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc; R2+ Matte.
b. Dow Chemical Co.
c. GAF
d. Hunter Panels, LLC; H-Shield
e. Hunter Panels, LLC; Xci Class A Foil
f. Johns Manville; AP Foil-Faced
g. Rmax Inc.; ECOMAXci
h. or equal
E. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation Faced with Plywood: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type V, fire-retardant-treated plywood one face, glass fiber mat facer one face, Class 3.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Compressive Strength: 25 psi
371
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
6. Plywood Thickness: 5/8 inch.
7. Insulation Board Thickness: 3 inches.
8. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 19.1.
9. Board Edges: Square.
10. Manufacturers:
a. Hunter Panels, LLC; Xci Ply
b. or equal
F. Composite Ventilated Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Wood Spacers and Oriented Strand Board (OSB) or Plywood: Rigid cellular foam with 1 inch wood spacers between foam and OSB or plywood; complying with ASTM C1289, Type II.
1. Top Layer Material: 7/16 inch (11 mm) oriented strand board (OSB).
2. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
3. Compressive Strength: 20 psi
4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
5. Composite Insulation Board Thickness: 6.0 inch.
6. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 28.1.
7. Board Edges: Square.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Hunter Panels, LLC; Cool-Vent
b. or equal
G. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation Faced with Oriented Strand Board (OSB) or Plywood: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type V, oriented strand board (OSB) one face, glass fiber mat face one side, Grade 2.
1. Top Layer Material: 7/16 inch (11 mm) oriented strand board (OSB).
2. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior nonload-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
3. Compressive Strength: 20 psi
4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch nominal.
5. Composite Insulation Board Thickness: 4.5 inch.
6. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 25.6.
7. Board Edges: Square.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Hunter Panels, LLC; H-Shield NB
b. or equal
H. Cellular Glass Board Insulation: ASTM C552, Type IV; cellular glass board, with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 5 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Board Size: 18 x 24 inch.
4. Board Thickness: 2 inches.
5. Board Edges: Square.
6. Apparent Thermal Conductivity; K value at 0 degrees F: 0.27.
7. Compressive Strength: Minimum 60 psi.
8. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM C240, 0.5 percent by volume maximum.
9. Facing: Factory applied skin of aluminum foil on both faces. 372
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.3 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where fiber board insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber board insulation may be used, at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C612.
1. Facing: None, unfaced.
2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Board Size: 48 x 48 inch.
5. Board Thickness: 1 inch.
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Thermal Conductivity (k factor): 0.26.
8. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.
9. Combustibility: Except for facing, if any, non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136.
10. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation
b. Johns Manville Corporation
c. Owens Corning Corp
d. Or Equal
C. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid or semi-rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C612 or C553; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1. Where indicated, provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Where indicated, provide fiberglass reinforced polypropylene facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Where indicated, provide black, non-woven fiberglass facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Board Size: 24 by 48 inches.
6. Board Thickness: 1 inch.
7. Thermal Resistance (R-value): 4.2 deg F sq ft/Btu at 75 degrees F, minimum, when tested according to ASTM C518.
8. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville International, Inc.
b. Thermafiber, Inc
c. ROXUL, Inc; CavityRock DD
d. or equal
2.4 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any.
373
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: per plan
6. Thickness: per plan
7. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
8. Facing: Aluminum foil, one side.
9. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation
b. Johns Manville Corporation
c. Owens Corning Corp
d. Or Equal
C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1. Where indicated, provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Thermal Resistance: per plan
4. Thickness: per plan
5. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville International, Inc.; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts b. Thermafiber, Inc.
c. ROXUL, Inc; ComfortBatt
d. ROXUL, Inc; Roxul AFB
e. or equal
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil thick.
B. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.
C. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.
D. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
E. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.
1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers.
F. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.
G. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.
H. Protection Board for Below Grade Insulation: Cementitious, 1/4 inch thick.
I. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.
374
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control, and expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B. Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Three continuous beads per board length.
2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick.
C. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
D. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint.
E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
F. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed insulation surfaces.
1. Apply adhesive in five continuous beads per board length.
2. Install boards horizontally from base of foundation to top of insulation.
3. Butt boards tightly, with joints staggered from insulation joints.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints between sheets.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B. Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Three continuous beads per board length.
2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick.
C. Install rigid insulation directly to steel studs or exterior grade sheathing at 16 inches on center with manufacturer recommended mechanical fasteners. Tape all joints with manufacturer's minimum 4 inch wide sealant tape; comply with ASTM E2357.
D. Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
E. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.
F. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
G. Place 6 inch wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal.
H. Tape insulation board joints.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS
A. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency as follows:
1. 6 per insulation board.
375
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints between sheets.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
C. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.
1. Place membrane surface against adhesive.
2. Place membrane surface facing out, and tape seal board joints.
D. Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
4. Place impale fastener locking discs.
E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
F. Place 6 inch wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab.
3.06 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK
A. Installation of board insulation over low slope roof deck is specified in Section 075400.
B. Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General:
1. See applicable roofing Specification Section for specific board installation requirements.
2. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of roofing system.
3. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions and applicable Factory Mutual requirements.
4. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day.
3.07 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER STEEP SLOPE ROOF SHEATHING OR ROOF
STRUCTURE
A. Installation of board insulation over steep slope roof structure or roof sheathing is specified in Section 06 1000.
3.08 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation.
E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center.
G. Tape insulation batts in place.
376
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100-9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
H. Retain insulation batts in place with wire mesh secured to framing members.
I. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
J. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center.
Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
K. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
L. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
M. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
N. Coordinate work of this Section with requirements for vapor retarder.
O. Coordinate work of this Section with construction of air barrier seal.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
377
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 07 5400 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanically attached PVC thermoplastic single-ply roofing system.
B. Fully adhered PVC thermoplastic single-ply roofing system.
C. Roof insulation.
D. Flashing accessories.
E. Edgings and terminations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) - ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Current Revision.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
C208 Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.
C578 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
C1289 Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
D4263 Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
D4434 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing.
E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
C. Factory Mutual (FM Global):
1. Approval Guide
a. Factory Mutual Standard 4470 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers. b. Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29.
D. International Building Code (or other locally adopted Building Code) E. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Low Slope Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Current Edition.
F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, 1nc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. TGFU R1306 - "Roofing Systems and Materials Guide".
2. UL-790 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Wind Uplift Performance:
1. Roof system is designed to withstand wind uplift forces as calculated using the current revision of ASCE-7.
2. Roof system is designed to achieve a FM DS 1-29 Field Wind Uplift of 60 psf, a Perimeter Wind Uplift of 75 psf and a Corner Wind Uplift of 120 psf. See also General Structural Notes.
B. Fire Resistance Performance:
1. Roof system will achieve a UL Class A rating when tested in accordance with UL-790.
C. Thermal Performance: Roof system will achieve a minimum R value not less than 30.
D. Drainage: Provide a roof system with positive drainage where all standing water dissipates within 48 hours after precipitation ends.
E. Building Codes:
378
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1. Roof system will meet the requirements of all federal, state and local code bodies having jurisdiction.
1.4 LEED CERTIFICATION
A. Coordinate with Green Building Requirements, for LEED certification submittal forms and certification templates.
B. Submittals Required:
1. SSc7.2 Heat Island Effect - Roof (LEED Form).
2. MRc4 Recycled Content (LEED Form).
3. MRc5 Local and Regional Materials (LEED Form).
4. EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants (LEED Form).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Detail Drawings:
1. Submit approved plan, section, elevation or isometric drawings which detail the appropriate methods for all flashing conditions found on the project.
2. Coordinate approved drawings with locations found on the Contract Drawings.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this Section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty (20) years’ experience.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. All products listed in this Section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions follow the manufacturer’s recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations.
B. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage.
C. Provide protection, such as ¾-inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters.
D. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease.
E. New roofing shall be complete and weather tight at the end of the work day.
F. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the 379
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
roofing membrane.
G. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. At project closeout, provide to OWNER or OWNER’s Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's Total System warranty, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
1. Duration: 30 Years.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Carlisle SynTec Systems,
B. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
2.2 SCOPE / APPLICATION
A. Roof System: Provide a waterproof roof system, capable of withstanding uplift forces as specified in this Section.
1. Membrane Attachment: Fully Adhered.
B. Base Flashing: Provide a waterproof, fully adhered base flashing system at all penetrations, plane transitions and terminations.
C. Insulation: Provide a roof insulation system beneath the finish membrane.
2.3 MEMBRANE ATTACHMENT: FULLY ADHERED
A. Sure-Flex FRS PVC Membrane as manufactured by Carlisle SynTec, or ENGINEER-approved equal
1. Membrane consists of Fiberglas Reinforced Scrim that is encapsulated between the PVC based top and bottom plies. The combination of the fabric and PVC plies provide Sure-Flex FRS PVC membranes with high breaking strength, tearing strength, and puncture resistance.
2. Color: White.
3. Membrane Thickness: 80 mil nominal.
a. Thickness over Scrim (ASTM D4434): 0.025 inches (0.635mm) minimum. b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 1500 psi (110.4 MPa) minimum. c. Tear Resistance (ASTM D1004): 10 lbf (45 N) minimum. d. Elongation at Break (ASTM D638): 250 percent minimum machine direction. 220 percent minimum cross machine direction.
e. Field Sheet Width: 120 inches (3048 mm) maximum.
f. Length: 65 feet (19.8 m) maximum.
2.4 INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate: A foam core insulation board covered on both sides with a medium weight fiber reinforced felt facer meeting ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1. Carlisle HP-H.
1. Compressive Strength: Grade 2 (20 psi) (138 kPa).
2.5 INSULATION ADHESIVE
A. FAST 100 or 100 LV Adhesive: A spray or extruded applied, two-component polyurethane, lowrise expanding foam adhesive used for attaching approved insulations to compatible substrates (concrete, cellular lightweight insulating concrete, gypsum, cementitious wood fiber, wood, or steel) or existing smooth or gravel surfaced BUR, modified bitumen, or cap sheets.
B. FAST 100 Catalyst: Added to FAST Adhesive (Part B Side) to quicken adhesive reaction time. 380
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. FAST Dual Cartridge Adhesive: A two-component, polyurethane construction grade, low-rising expanding adhesive designed for bonding insulation to various substrates using a portable applicator.
D. OlyBond 500 BA - A two-component, polyurethane, low-rise expanding adhesive used to bond insulation to various substrates using a mechanical dispenser system.
E. OlyBond Spot Shot - A two-component, polyurethane construction grade, low-rising expanding adhesive designed for bonding insulation to various substrates using a portable applicator.
2.6 FLASHING ACCESSORIES
A. Sure-Flex PVC Inside Corners: Pre-molded corner flashing for inside corners. 80 mil thickness.
1. Color: White.
B. Sure-Flex PVC Outside Corners: Pre-molded corner flashing for outside corners. 80 mil thickness.
1. Color: White.
C. Sure-Flex PVC T-Joint Covers: 40 mil thick non-reinforced PVC flashing cut into a 4.5-inch (114mm) diameter circle used to seal step-offs at splice intersections.
1. Color: White.
D. Sure-Flex PVC Molded Pipe Flashings: A pre-molded flashing and clamping ring used for pipe penetrations. Available for 1 inch to 6 inch (25 to 152mm) diameter pipes.
E. Sure-Flex PVC Split Pipe Seals: Pre-fabricated flashing consisting of 60-mil-thick reinforced SureFlex Membrane for pipes 1 inch to 6 inches (25 to152mm) in diameter. A split (cut) and overlap tab are incorporated to allow the pipe seal to be opened and wrapped around the pipe when it is not possible to pull a standard pipe flashing over a round penetration.
F. Sure-Flex PVC Square Tubing Wraps: Fabricated flashings made of 60-mil-thick reinforced SureFlex membrane for square tubing. A split (cut) and overlap tab are incorporated into these parts to allow the seals to be opened and wrapped around a square penetration. Available for 3 inches, 4 inches and 6 inches (76, 102, 152 mm) diameter square tubing.
G. Sure-Flex PVC Molded Sealant Pockets:
1. Pre-fabricated, interlocking, 2-piece, injection molded, flexible pocket with a rigid polypropylene vertical wall and pre-formed deck flanges.
2. Use in conjunction with Thermoplastic One-Part Pourable Sealer as specified in this Section for waterproofing pipe clusters or other odd shaped penetrations. Forms a 7-1/2 inches by 6 inches (191 x 152mm) oval when completed. Available in white only.
H. PVC Overlayment Strip: Manufacturer's standard PVC overlayment strip.
I. Sure-Flex PVC Non-Reinforced Flashing: 80 mil thick rolls 12 inches (305 mm) and 24 inches 610 mm) wide. Used for inside/outside corners and field fabricated pipe flashings when use of premolded accessories is not feasible.
J. PVC Contour Rib Profile: Extruded PVC profile measuring 1-1/4 inches tall and 2-1/8 inches wide (32 mm by 54 mm) including the welding flanges while the vertical profile is 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick. Available in 10 feet (3048 mm) lengths.
2.7 CLEANERS, PRIMERS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
A. Low VOC PVC Bonding Adhesive: A high-strength solvent based adhesive that allows bonding of PVC and KEE-enhanced PVC membrane to various porous and non-porous substrates.
B. Aqua Base 120 Bonding Adhesive: Semi-pressure-sensitive water-based adhesive used as a twosided contact adhesive.
C. HydroBond PVC Water Based Bonding Adhesive: One Sided, wet lay-in water based bonding adhesive.
381
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
D. Sure-Flex PVC Cut Edge Sealant: Free flowing, clear sealant designed for sealing cut edges of Sure-Flex reinforced membrane.
E. Water Cut-Off Mastic: A one-component, low viscosity, self-wetting, Butyl blend mastic used as a compression sealing agent between membrane and applicable substrates.
F. White One-Part Pourable Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended product.
G. CCW 702 Primer: Manufacturer's recommended product.
H. Cav-Grip: Manufacturer's recommended product.
I. Universal Single-Ply Sealant: A 100 percent solids, solvent free, one-part polyether sealant that is used as a termination bar sealant. Available in white only.
J. Thermoplastic One-Part Pourable Sealant: Single component, moisture curing, elastomeric polyether sealant that is compatible with Carlisle's Thermoplastic membranes. Provides a flexible, durable and long lasting seal around hard-to-flash penetrations in Thermoplastic Roofing Systems.
K. PVC Membrane Cleaner: Clear, solvent-based cleaner used to loosen and remove contaminants from the surface of exposed membrane.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. HP Fastener: A threaded E-coat square head fastener for insulation attachment only. Used into steel, wood plank, minimum 15/32 inch (12 mm) thick plywood or minimum 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick oriented strand board (OSB).
B. HP-X Fastener: A heavy duty #15 threaded fastener with a #3 Phillips drive used with Carlisle's Piranha Fastening Plate to secure Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems. It is used on minimum 22 gauge steel decks or minimum 15/32 inch (12 mm) CDX plywood decks. It is also designed to offer an optimum combination of driving performance, back-out and corrosion resistance with excellent pullout performance.
C. InsulFast Fasteners: A threaded Phillips drive fastener used with Carlisle Insulation Plates for insulation attachment to steel or wood decks.
D. Pre-Assembled ASAP Fastener: Carlisle's InsulFAST Fastener pre-assembled with a 3 inches (76 mm) diameter plastic plate used for insulation attachment only on Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems. Installed using Olympic Fasteners' Fastening Tool.
E. HP Term Bar Nail-In: A 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) long expansion anchor with threaded drive pin used for fastening
F. Sure-Seal Termination Bar or Seam Fastening Plates to concrete, brick or block walls.
G. Piranha Plate: A 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) diameter metal barbed fastening plate used with Carlisle HP-X, CD-10 or HD 14-10 Fasteners for membrane or insulation securement. This plate can be used for membrane or insulation securement on Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems.
H. HP-Xtra Piranha Plate: A 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) diameter metal barbed fastening plate with an oversized hole for use with Carlisle HP-Xtra Fasteners for membrane securement on Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems.
I. Seam Fastening Plate: A 2 inches (51 mm) diameter metal plate used for insulation attachment on Mechanically Fastened Systems or membrane securement at angle changes on Adhered Systems in conjunction with the appropriate Carlisle Fastener.
J. Insulation Fastening Plate: A nominal 3 inches (76 mm) metal plate used for insulation attachment in conjunction with the appropriate Carlisle Fastener.
K. Oval Barbed Plate: A 2-3/4 inches x 1-1/2 inches (70 mm x 38 mm) oval metal barbed fastening plate for use with Carlisle HP-X fasteners for securement of 10 feet (3048 mm) wide PVC membrane on Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems.
382
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
A. EDGINGS AND TERMINATIONS SecurEdge 200: A snap-on edge system consisting of a 24- gauge galvanized metal water dam. Finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
B. SecurEdge 300: A 24-gauge galvanized metal water dam. Finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
C. SecurEdge 400: A 24-gauge galvanized metal water dam. Finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
D. SecurEdge 1000: A metal anchor bar fascia system consisting of a formed quarter hard 0.050 inch (1.25 mm) aluminum retainer bar, corrosion resistant fasteners and a 0.040 inch (1 mm) aluminum or 24 gauge steel snap-on fascia cover.
E. SecurEdge 2000: An anchor bar roof edge fascia system consisting of 0.100 inch (2.5 mm) thick extruded aluminum bar, corrosion resistant stainless steel fasteners and snap-on fascia cover.
F. SecurEdge 3000: A metal anchor bar fascia system consisting of a 20-gauge steel retainer bar, corrosion resistant fasteners and aluminum or 24 gauge steel snap-on fascia cover.
G. SecurEdge 4000: A metal anchor bar fascia system consisting of a 20-gauge steel retainer bar, corrosion resistant fasteners and aluminum or 24 gauge steel snap-on fascia cover.
H. Sure-Seal Drip Edge: A 22-gauge pre-punched 90-degree angle cleat and 12 foot (3658mm) long fascia sections. Kynar 500 or aluminum finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
I. SecurEdge 200 Coping: An anchor cleat with pre-slotted holes, a concealed joint cover, and 10 or 12 foot sections of coping cap. Kynar 500 finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
J. SecurEdge 300 Coping: An anchor cleat with pre-slotted holes, a concealed joint cover, and 10 or 12 foot sections of coping cap. Kynar 500 finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
K. SecurEdge 400 Coping: An anchor cleat with pre-slotted holes, a concealed joint cover, and 10 or 12 foot sections of coping cap. Kynar 500 finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.
L. Sure-Seal Ballast Retaining Bar: A ballast retaining perimeter securement system comprised of a slotted extruded aluminum retention bar with integrated compression fastening strip.
M. Sure-Seal Termination Bar: 1 inch (13 mm) wide, .098 inch (2.5mm) thick extruded aluminum bar pre-punched 6 inches (152 mm) on center with sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Do not commence Work until all other work trades have completed jobs that require them to traverse the deck on foot or with equipment.
D. A vapor retarder / temporary roof (Carlisle 725 TR Air & Vapor Barrier/Temporary Roof) may be 383
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
applied to protect the inside of the structure prior to the roof system installation.
3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Steel Deck:
1. Metal decks shall be a minimum uncoated thickness of 22-gauge and have a G-90 galvanized finish on all panels.
2. Decks must comply with the gauge and span requirements in the current Factory Mutual Approval Guide and be installed in accordance with Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 or specific FM approval.
3. Remove any surface corrosion and repair severely corroded areas. Properly fasten loose or inadequately secured decking.
3.4 INSULATION - SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Base Layer:
1. Type: InsulBase Polyisocyanurate HP-H.
2. Thickness: 4.0 inches.
3. Attachment Method: Fasteners with plates and adhesive.
B. Top Layer:
1. Type: InsulBase Polyisocyanurate HP-H.
2. Thickness: 2.0 inches.
3. Attachment Method: Fasteners with plates and adhesive.
3.5 INSULATION PLACEMENT
A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided.
B. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required mechanical fasteners or insulation adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's current application guidelines.
C. Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards.
D. Stagger joints in one direction unless joints are to be taped. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill all gaps in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) with same insulation material.
E. Wood nailers must be at least 3 1/2 inches (89 mm) wide or 1 inch (25 mm) wider than adjacent metal flange. Thickness must equal that of insulation but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thickness.
F. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at ridges, valleys and other changes in plane to prevent open joints or irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the corners.
G. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely waterproofed each day.
3.6 INSULATION ATTACHMENT
A. Securely attach insulation to the roof deck for Adhered or Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems.
Attachment must have been successfully tested to meet or exceed the calculated uplift pressure required by the Building Code or ANSI/SPRI WD-1.
B. Enhance the perimeter and corner areas in accordance with the Building Code or ANSI/SPRI WD1.
C. Install insulation layers applied with adhesive, coverage rate as necessary to achieve the specified attachment and uplift rating. Press each board firmly into place after adhesive develops strings when touched, typically 1-1/2 to 2 minutes after adhesive was applied, and roll with a weighted roller. Add temporary weight and use relief cuts to ensure boards are well adhered. Stagger the 384
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
joints of additional layers by a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm).
3.7 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT (Fully Adhered)
A. Position Sure-Flex membrane over the acceptable substrate. Fold membrane sheet back lengthwise so half the underside of the membrane is exposed.
B. Apply Sure-Flex Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area. Do not apply Bonding Adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.
1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.
2. Fold back the unbonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures.
C. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2 inches (51mm).
D. Hot-air weld the Sure-Flex membrane sheets using the Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's hot air welding procedures.
E. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2 inches (51mm) and complete the bonding procedures as stated previously.
F. Hot-air weld membrane using an Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's current guidelines. At all splice intersections, roll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam.
G. Probe all seams once the hot air welds have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30 minutes).
H. Repair all seam deficiencies the same day they are discovered.
I. Apply Cut Edge Sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane (where the scrim reinforcement is exposed) after seam probing is complete. Cut Edge Sealant is not required but recommended on flat surfaces and is not required on vertical splices.
3.8 FLASHING
A. Flashing of parapets, curbs, expansion joints and other parts of the roof must be performed using Sure-Flex reinforced membrane. Sure-Flex non-reinforced membrane may be used for flashing pipe penetrations, Sealant Pockets, and scuppers, as well as inside and outside corners, when the use of pre-molded accessories is not feasible.
B. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications.
3.9 DAILY SEALS
A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration.
B. Complete an acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.10 CLEAN UP
A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner.
B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking.
3.11 PROTECTION
385
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5400 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07 5400
386
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all formed and/or flat metal 11-gauge and lighter, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as herein modified, fabricate, and install work in accordance with printed standards of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
1.3 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Indicate type, gauge, and shape of sheet metal items; type, size, location, and spacing of all joints, including expansion joints; shop finishes and other required coatings.
1.4 1.04 DELIVERY
A. Time deliveries with construction progress. Cooperate with various trades to which sheet metal items are furnished and with those whose progress of work is dependent upon installation of sheet metal items.
1.5 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Guarantee sheet metal work for a period of 2 years to be free of water leaks.
B. Guarantee shall include replacement and/or repair of other work damaged by water due to leakage in sheet metal work.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: Plain Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 3003, 3004, Alclad 3003 or Alclad 3004; appropriate temper, except where temper is specified; mill finish unless otherwise specified.
B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, copper bearing. Unless otherwise noted, gauges indicated or specified are Galvanized Sheet Gauge. Zinc coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A525 and shall not be less than coating Class G90.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General:
1. Type best suited for intended purposes.
2. Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners with aluminum.
3. Use stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners with zinc-coated steel.
4. Use only stainless steel fasteners when attaching dissimilar metals.
B. Material:
1. Aluminum Fastener Materials: Ally 6061 or 5056.
2. Stainless Steel Materials: Type 305
3. Fasteners for Securing Sheet metal to Concrete and Masonry shall be Fastway Extruded Vinyl Anchors, Holub “Hi-Red” plastic screw anchors, “Star” plastic anchors or equal nonferrous anchors, used with wood or sheet metal screws of specified type material; lead anchors are not acceptable.
4. Nails for Securing Sheet metal to Wood shall be the specified type material; barbed, annular thread or screw type.
387
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.3 SOLDER
A. Type and composition best suited for material being soldered.
B. Composition Sn50 for galvanized metal.
C. For aluminum, use solder composition as recommended by metal manufacturer for type alloy to be soldered.
2.4 FLUX
A. Type and composition best suited for material being soldered.
2.5 PRIMERS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, brushable.
B. Galvanized Metal Primer: Zinc Dust-zinc Oxide Primer as specified under Section 09 9100, Painting.
2.6 BUTYL SEALING TAPE PRC
A. Butyl-Lock sealant type: Morrison & Company’s CL-50 “Cushion-Lock” sealing tape or equal (3/32-inch x 1-inch).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Cut edges or joints and abrasions exposing base metal of galvanized sheet metal shall be coated with solder to equivalent thickness of zinc coating before assembling or installing sheet metal items.
B. Wipe all soldered joints clean of flux. Completely neutralize acid fluxes by washing soldered joints with soda.
C. Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with wood with asphalt primer, and allow to dry before setting in place.
D. Coat all metal surfaces in contact with built-up roofing using asphalt bitumen with asphalt primer, and allow to dry before setting in place.
E. Provide insulation of dissimilar metals from contact with each other with coating of asphalt primer.
F. Finish all sheet metal work straight and true, with miters and joints accurately fitted. Exposed work shall be free of dents. All corners shall be reinforced, and seams soldered or otherwise made waterproof. Exposed edges shall be hemmed or finished smooth.
G. All work shall be made watertight. Expect where provision is required for expansion and contraction, all joints and seams shall be locked or otherwise made mechanically strong. Solder may be used, where appropriated, to make joints and seams watertight, but shall not be considered as providing mechanical strength.
1. Flashing: Flashing throughout shall be 26-gauge galvanized iron or 20-gauge aluminum.
Unless otherwise shown, flashing shall be at locations indicated on Drawings and as otherwise required for watertight construction.
2. Downspouts: Downspout sleeves shall be galvanized iron, sizes indicated on Drawings.
Miter and solder at change of direction.
3. Gutters: Gutters shall be galvanized iron or aluminum, shaped as shown on Drawings. Miter corners and solder joints. Joints shall be lapped, riveted, or soldered. Slip joints, where required, shall have grooves sealed with white butyl sealing tape. Gutter expansion joints shall be located midway between downspout outlets and shall fall on a 4-foot module. The joint shall be of a design, which will provide watertight connection and permit freedom of movement of the gutter lining.
388
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.2 SHOP PAINTING
A. Galvanized steel, except as otherwise specified, shall be given a shop treatment of copper acetate solution of 6 ounces of copper acetate to one gallon of water, and followed by a brush or spray-coat of galvanized metal primer compatible with finish coat system.
3.3 ASSEMBLIES
A. Fabricate assemblies from materials and of gauges indicated or specified. Where material is not indicated, fabricate from zinc-coated steel not loess that 26-gauge, aluminum not less than 20-gauge.
B. Seal between laps of expansion joints of gutters, flashing, etc., with butyl sealing tape.
C. Cleats supporting bottom edge of edging, etc., shall be continuous, secure, and not more than 12-inch centers.
D. Secure deck flanges of edging, etc., on not more than 4-inch centers.
END OF SECTION 07 6200
389
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install caulking and sealing as indicated in Division 03 and 04.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Indicate manufacturers and brand names, colors available and locations where each will be used.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of the general conditions except as noted below.
B. Guarantee all work of this Section for a period of 2 years.
C. Guarantee all work against water leaks, air infiltration, sagging and pulling loose.
D. Guarantee shall include replacement and/or repair of other work damaged by water leakage in caulking and sealant work.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealants in original sealed containers, each bearing manufacturer’s name and product designation.
B. Do not retain at the job site material, which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Types 1 to 4 Sealants: Polyurethane sealants conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227E Type II & ANSI A116.1.
1. Type 1 Sealant: Two part 30-40 Shore A, non-sag
a. Manufacture Sikaflex – 2C or equal
2. Type 2 Sealant: Two part, 35-45 Shore A, self-leveling.
3. Type 3 Sealant: Two part, 20-35 Shore A, self-leveling.
4. Type 4 Sealant: Two part, 20-35 Shore A, non-sag.
B. Type 5 Sealant: One component, elastomeric gun grade polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Use NT, M, A, G, and I Federal Specifications TT-S-00230C Type 2, Class A.
1. Manufacturer: Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 1 or equal.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primers: As specified by sealant manufacturer
B. Backup Materials: Closed cell polyethylene foam
C. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene film.
2.3 COLOR
A. Color for each location of use shall be as selected by Owner and in accordance with the contract documents. Non-availability of a required color within a particular brand of otherwise approved material shall not act to relieve obligation to furnish material of required color and conforming to specifications.
390
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Colors shall be selected to best blend with adjoining materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATIONS FOR SEALANT TYPES
A. Type 1 Sealant: Use for all interior and exterior construction, expansion joints, etc., associated with sealing the joints in the concrete tanks
B. Type 2 Sealant: Except as hereinafter specified, use for all interior and exterior horizontal joints subject to foot traffic.
C. Type 3 Sealant: Except as hereinafter specified, or where Type 1 sealant is required, use for all exterior horizontal joint.
D. Type 4 Sealant: Use for all exterior vertical surfaces.
E. Type 5 Sealant: Use for all interior work except where Type 1 sealant is required.
F. Caulk and seal all open joints, both interior and exterior; at junction of metal frames and walls; at other locations as noted on drawings.
G. Generally, expansion joints in exterior concreted flatwork on grade, curbs, and gutter for sitework, etc.; joint fillers will not require a joint sealant. Where sealant is noted on drawings for such joints, sealant shall be Type 1 and a bond breaker shall be installed along top of joint filler, full width of joint, to present contact between sealant and joint filler.
3.2 SEALANT AND JOINT DETAILS
A. Joint Sizes:
1. Types 1, 2, 3 and 4 Sealants:
a. Minimum joint size: ¼-inch x ¼-inch
b. Depth to width ration of joint shall be a recommended by sealant manufacturer. c. Maximum width: Sealant manufacturer’s recommended maximum.
2. Type 4 Sealant: Maximum joint size shall be 3/8-inch x ½-inch.
B. Joints deeper than above shall have backup material installed to maintain specified depth.
C. With Types 1, 2, 3, and 4 sealants, a bond breaker shall be installed, unless backup material is used, so that sealant bonds only sides of joints.
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Carefully and thoroughly clean surfaces with cleaner, and in matter recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Prime surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Apply sealants smoothly and uniformly. Mask surfaces each side of joints to protect adjacent surface and to form straight, even edges.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
391
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames
2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames
3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors
4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Conditions".
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors.
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.
C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association ANSI/NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies
ANSI/SDI 122 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI A250.4 Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI A250.8 Standard Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Erection Instructions for Steel Frames ASTM A1008 Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A924 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM C1363 Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
UL 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
392
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware
5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections
6. Details of accessories
7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing
8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems D. Samples for Verification:
1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450°F (250°C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material.
E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and CONTRACTOR to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
393
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Building Information Modeling (BIM) Support: Utilize designated BIM software tools and obtain training needed to successfully participate in the Project BIM processes. All technical disciplines are responsible for the product data integration and data reliability of their Work into the coordinated BIM applications.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames from a SDI Certified manufacturer:
1. CECO Door Products (C).
2. Curries Company (CU).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”. 394
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
a. Provide 22-gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" oncenter to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted. b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.37 and R-Value
2.7, including insulated door, thermal-break frame, and threshold. c. Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor
0.38 and R-Value 2.6, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9".
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet.
5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
D. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. Curries Company (CU) - Energy Efficient - 777 Trio-E Series.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings.
2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.
3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) – M Series.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A1008/A 1008M.
1. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 395
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) - CM Series.
D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified.
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
4. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations.
5. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
6. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.
396
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
7. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions.
8. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
9. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service procedure.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General CONTRACTOR to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.).
397
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar.
4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8-inch plus or minus 1/16-inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8-inch plus or minus 1/16-inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8-inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum ¾-inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. 398
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”. Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected.
1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
399
CHAIN OPERATED INSULATED SERVICE DOORS 08 3300 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 08 3300 - CHAIN OPERATED INSULATED SERVICE DOORS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. All Rolling Insulated Service Doors shall be as manufactured by The Cookson Company, Phoenix, Arizona. Furnished materials shall include all curtains, bottom bars, guides, brackets, hoods, operating mechanisms, and any special features.
B. Work not to be included by The Cookson Company includes design of, material for and preparation of door openings but not limited to structural or miscellaneous iron work, access panels, finish painting.
1.2 Quality Assurance
A. Exterior rolling insulated service doors shall be designed to withstand at least a twenty (20) pounds per square foot windload. Windlocks shall be installed on doors over 16’1” wide.
B. All rolling insulated service doors shall be designed to a standard maximum of 25 cycles per day and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. The door curtain shall be constructed of interconnected strip steel slats conforming to ASTM A653.
The slats shall be designated by The Cookson Company as No. 45 (measuring 3” high by 7/8” deep) consisting of a 22-gauge exterior slat and a 22-gauge interior slat separated by 13/16” of rigid insulation.
B. The finish on the door curtain shall be Cookson FinalCote consisting of the following:
1. Hot dipped galvanized G-90 coating consistent with ASTM A653
2. Bonderized coating for prime coat adhesion
3. Corrosion inhibiting primer .2 mils per side
4. Thermosetting gray polyester top coat with a minimum thickness of .6 mils each side C. The bottom bar shall consist of two 1/8” angles mechanically joined together with a 1” diameter vinyl covered foam edge astragal continuous along the bottom. The finish on the bottom bar shall be one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.
D. The guides shall consist of 3 steel angles bolted together with 3/8” fasteners to form a channel for the curtain to travel. Extruded vinyl snap-on weatherstripping shall be furnished continuously along the exterior leg of each guide. The wall angle portion shall be continuous and fastened to the surrounding structure with either minimum 1/2” fasteners or welds, both on 36” centers. The finish on the guide angles shall be one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.
E. The brackets shall be constructed of steel not less than 1/4” thick and shall be bolted to the wall angle with minimum 1/2” fasteners. The finish on the brackets shall be one (1) coat of bronze rustinhibiting prime paint.
F. All gears shall be cast iron with teeth cast from machine cut patterns. The pinion gear shall not be less than a 3” pitch diameter. The gear ratio shall be designed for a maximum effort of not more than 30 pounds.
G. The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 6” in diameter. Oil tempered torsion springs shall be capable of correctly counter balancing the width of the curtain. The barrel shall be designed to limit the maximum deflection to .03” per foot of opening width. The springs shall be adjusted by means of an exterior wheel. The finish on the barrel shall be one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.
400
CHAIN OPERATED INSULATED SERVICE DOORS 08 3300 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
H. The hood shall be fabricated from 24-gauge galvanized steel and shall be formed to fit the curvature of the brackets. The hood shall contain a waterproof baffle to control air infiltration. The finish on the hood shall be the Cookson FinalCote finish as indicated in the curtain section.
2.2 Operation
A. Chain operated doors shall open and close with a maximum of 30 pounds of effort utilizing an endless chain and cast iron reduction gears.
2.3 Locking Mechanisms
A. The chain door shall be secured by means of a chain lock.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
A. All Cookson Rolling Insulated Service doors shall be installed by an authorized Cookson distributor.
3.2 Warranty
A. All Cookson Rolling Insulated Service Doors shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from the time of shipment against defects in workmanship and materials.
END OF SECTION 08 3300
401
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior entrance framing systems.
2. Exterior storefront systems.
1.3 Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1100 – Metal Doors and Frames
2. Section 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows
3. Section 08 8000 –Glazing
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following:
1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units.
B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.
C. Wind Loads: See Structural Plans (General Structural Notes, GSN). Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (2018 IBC) or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"
6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent.
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to L/240 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E330.
a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category
D. Seismic Loads: See Structural GSN. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever are more stringent.
E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.
2. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between members and doors. 402
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads as required by IBC without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
G. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
Water leakage is defined as follows:
1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
I. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120°F, ambient; 180°F, material surfaces.
J. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.
K. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: For entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work.
1. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, quantities, and locations.
2. Engineering Details and Calculations: Submit detail plans, specifications, and engineering calculations for structural support for review and approval of Architect, and structural engineer.
D. Engineering Details and Calculations: Submit detail plans, specifications, and engineering calculations for structural support for review and approval by DESIGN/BUILDER (Architect, and structural engineer).
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
F. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' written interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
403
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of entrance and storefront systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current systems.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by Architect, except with Owner or DESIGN/BUILDER’s approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code- -Aluminum."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Failure of operating components to function normally.
5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
404
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
4. U. S. Aluminum
5. Old Castle Glass
6. Or approved equal
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429.
4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B211.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A36 for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements.
F. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Division 7 Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.
H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Door frames: equal to EFCO System 945 Quick Set Door Framing.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets.
2. Stile Design: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Storefront: EFCO System 945 Quick Set Screw Spline Framing or equal as detailed on drawings.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 requirements.
F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer.
G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows:
405
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D2287 requirements.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
1. Fabricate components for screw-spline frame construction.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
F. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
H. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible.
Reinforce door frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.
2.6 STEEL PRIMING
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.
B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.
C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
406
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. Provide fasteners to structure in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, shop drawings, and approved contract documents. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7.
E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members.
F. Install entrance framing plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate factory-installed operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
G. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.
2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation of test areas indicated, test storefront system for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 requirements.
B. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces. 407
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08 4113
408
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
2. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series.
2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. ANSI/UL 294 - Access Control System Units.
4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
5. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
409
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD).
C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this Section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 410
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.
G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 411
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2. Five years for exit hardware.
3. Twenty five years for manual overhead door closer bodies.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced Section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 412
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney (MK).
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets.
Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types:
1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks.
4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks.
5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
6. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
D. Removable Cores: Provide removable cores as specified, core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.
413
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.
3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.
H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
2.5 KEY CONTROL
A. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment (LU).
b. MMF Industries (MM).
c. Telkee (TK).
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series.
2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Mortise Deadlocks, Large Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed large case mortise type deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. One piece stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series.
2.8 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.
414
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
2.10 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 415
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.
5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (NO) - 7500 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series.
2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers.
Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
416
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF).
2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko (PE).
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.15 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
417
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections.
Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”. Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected.
1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 418
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products.
3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening.
4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK – McKinney
2. SA – Sargent
3. RO – Rockwood
4. RF – Rixson
5. NO – Norton
6. PE – Pemko
7. OT - Other
419
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0
Doors: D101, D102, D105
8 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 NRP US32D MK
1 Mullion 980S PC SA
1 Rim Exit Device, Storeroom 43 64 8804 Less Pull US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device, Exit Only 43 8810 EO US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Vandal Resistant Trim VRT26 C US32D RO
2 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
2 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
2 Door Stop 466-RKW Black RO
1 Threshold 158A (Or as detailed) PE
1 Gasketing 2891AS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Gasketing 5110BL PE
2 Sweep 315CN PE
Notes: Mount PA bracket on top of rigid seal.
Set: 2.0
Doors: B101, B102, C101, C102
4 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 NRP US32D MK
1 Rim Exit Device,
Storeroom 43 64 8804 Less Pull US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Vandal Resistant Trim VRT26 C US32D RO
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Door Stop 466-RKW Black RO
1 Threshold 158A (Or as detailed) PE
1 Gasketing 2891AS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Sweep 315CN PE
Notes: Mount rim strike and PA bracket on top of rigid seal. 420
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Set: 2.1
Doors: D103, D104
3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 NRP US32D MK
1 Rim Exit Device,
Storeroom 43 64 8804 Less Pull US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Vandal Resistant Trim VRT26 C US32D RO
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK
BEV US32D RO
1 Door Stop 466-RKW Black RO
1 Threshold 158A (Or as detailed) PE
1 Gasketing 2891AS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Sweep 315CN PE
Notes: Mount rim strike and PA bracket on top of rigid seal.
Set: 3.0
Doors: A101, A102.1
4 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2314 NRP US32D MK
1 Classroom Lock 64 8237 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 158A (Or as detailed) PE
1 Gasketing 303AS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Sweep 315CN PE
421
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Set: 3.1
Doors: A110A
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2314 NRP US32D MK
1 Classroom Lock 64 8237 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 158A (Or as detailed) PE
1 Gasketing 303AS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Sweep 315CN PE
Set: 4.0
Doors: A111
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 NRP US26D MK
1 Storeroom/Closet Lock 64 8204 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Conc Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
Set: 5.0
Doors: A108
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK
1 Storeroom/Closet
Lock 64 8204 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
422
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Set: 6.0
Doors: A102, A103, A109
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK
1 Office/Entry Lock 64 8205 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
1 Coat Hook 790 US26D RO
Set: 7.0
Doors: A105
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK
1 Classroom Lock 64 8237 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
Set: 8.0
Doors: A104
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 NRP US26D MK
1 Classroom Lock 64 8237 LNP US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Surface Closer PR7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
423
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Set: 9.0
Doors: A107
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK
1 Classroom
Deadlock 64 8203 US32D SA
1 Core 6300 US15 SA
1 Push Pull 111x73C/73CL US32D RO
1 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" X 1" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
1 Wall Stop (Convex) 406 US26D RO
1 Gasketing S88D PE
Set: 10.0
Doors: A110B, B103, B104, C103, C104
1 All Hardware By Door Manufacturer OT
Notes: Roll up door.
END OF SECTION 08 7100
424
PAINTING 09 9100 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 09 9100 – PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to do all painting (excluding items listed in Section 099700 - Special Coatings), including preparation, priming, and protection of finished surfaces. An extensive and comprehensive painting job will be required and shall include all surfaces which normally are painted.
B. The intent of these Specifications is to obtain the material and workmanship necessary to produce an adequate and acceptable job, and is intended to describe the requirements for both shop and field painting.
C. The intent of this Specification Section is to include all items which are to receive painting and have not been included in Section 099700 – Special Coatings.
D. The intent of this Specification Section and Section 099700 – Special Coatings shall be to paint all exposed structural steel, miscellaneous ferrous metal, lintels, equipment, piping, all exterior masonry walls and all other work obviously required or noted to be painted unless otherwise specified (see Section 2.1). The omission of minor items in the schedule of work shall not relieve the obligation to include such items where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. All interior surfaces and equipment which have been previously painted shall be repainted or recoated following the proper surface preparation as shown on the Drawings.
E. Review and examine all Divisions and Sections of these Specifications for any additional painting requirements and/or additional surfaces or items to be painted.
F. Apply specified finish coats of paint to all pre-primed work and complete finishing system for unprimed work required to be painted.
G. Backprime, with specified interior first coat material all surfaces of finish trim which will be concealed after installation.
H. Apply specified finish coats of paint to all prepainted surfaces which require only a finish coat.
Otherwise, the complete system (as given in Section 2.1) shall be administered.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Wherever detailed painting requirements are covered under an equipment or product specification, the Specifications herein and Section 099700 – Special Coatings govern with respect to surface preparation, paint materials, coats, thicknesses and coverage.
1.03 ITEMS NOT REQUIRING FIELD PAINTING
A. All new galvanized and stainless steel surfaces (except where noted on Drawings, and in 099700).
B. Valves, fittings and appurtenances in small diameter plastic piping (less than 3 inches).
C. Prefinished items.
D. Plain copper (except as required for color coding) and stainless steel.
E. Aluminum except where otherwise designated and required to prevent corrosion at contact with dissimilar materials.
F. Concrete floors, except where noted.
G. Exterior concrete surfaces, except where noted.
H. Finish hardware.
I. Concealed from view items (except where required for color coding) and surfaces, except as specified herein or where previously painted.
425
PAINTING 09 9100 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
J. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment.
K. Mechanical equipment (i.e. pumps, blowers, actuators, etc.)
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The term “paint” as used herein includes enamels, epoxy, paints, sealers, fillers, emulsions and other coatings.
B. MDMTPC = Minimum dry mil thickness per coat.
C. MDFT = Minimum dry film thickness.
D. SSPC = Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Painters: All painting shall be done by qualified, skilled, experienced craftsmen.
In the acceptance or rejection of completed painting, no allowance will be made for lack of skills on the part of the craftsmen.
B. Paint Labels: Labels on paint containers shall include the following:
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Generic type of paint
3. Manufacturer's stock number
4. Color
5. Instructions for thinning where applicable
C. Field Quality Control: Paint film thickness shall be subject to measurement by electrometer, wet film gauge, low or high voltage meter, and/or ENGINEER approved measuring instruments. If dry film thickness is found to be less than specified, or coverage is not uniform, apply additional paint to correct the thickness or appearance at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Compatibility:
1. Compatibility of all paints used is required. A compatible paint will be considered a paint which precludes adverse effects related to bonding, drying delamination, scaling, lifting and bleeding.
2. In cases where shop-applied primers and coatings on materials and equipment furnished by suppliers are products different from those described in the Specifications, compatibility shall be verified with the specified field-applied coating system.
3. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint, and products for thinning purposes only, will be allowed.
E. Thickness and Spreading Rates:
1. Minimum dry mil thicknesses per coat (MDMTPC) and/or spreading rates in square feet per gallon shall be governed by the manufacturer's current data sheets or literature containing recommendations or instructions regarding these values. These recommended dry mil thickness and/or spreading rate values will be considered requirements to be met same as if set out herein these Specifications and Contract Documents. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended coverage rates.
2. The number of coats to be applied are specified herein and shall govern. Where the total dry film thickness is specified, this thickness shall govern over the MDMTPC.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery: All materials shall be brought to the project site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer. All labels shall be legible and intact at time of use.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Paint manufacturer's written instructions for proper surface preparation, mixing, thinning, application and drying shall be furnished with the paint, and strictly followed.
426
PAINTING 09 9100 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Storage of Materials:
1. Store only acceptable materials on project site.
2. Store only in a suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment.
3. Comply with all applicable health and fire regulations regarding the storage of paint materials.
4. Storage of material shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications; however, storage shall be at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.
D. Protection of Materials:
1. Take all necessary precautions to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste.
2. Painting wastes shall be properly deposited in containers made for this purpose. Do not use plumbing fixtures for disposing of paints wastes.
3. Take all necessary precautions to protect paint materials before, during and after application and to protect the finished work.
E. Replacement: In the event of damage to paint materials, immediately make all replacements necessary at no additional cost.
F. Product delivery, handling and storage shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Specification.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to the environmental conditions under which painting systems can be applied.
2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust and/or mist is being generated.
B. Climatic Conditions: Paint shall not be applied if:
1. The ambient temperature or temperature of the surface to be painted is below 50 degrees F or below the temperature recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. The relative humidity is above 85 percent.
3. The relative humidity is such that the paint will not dry properly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Projection:
1. Protect with drop cloths, masking or other acceptable means all surfaces which could be damaged in function or appearance by paint, including surfaces not being painted concurrently and surfaces not to be painted.
2. Hardware, accessories, fixtures and similar items shall be removed and replaced after completion of painting.
3. Spray painting will not be permitted when it will cause damage to adjacent of otherwise located surfaces.
4. All paint splatters on glass shall be wiped off immediately.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. All paints of a system shall be by one (1) manufacturer.
2. "Lift" tests may be requested on various surfaces to be painted to assure bonding compatibility.
3. Paints containing lead, or other "dangerous" materials, that surpass federal maximum levels shall not be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 427
PAINTING 09 9100 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.02 COLORS
A. The manufacturer shall be able to furnish all paints for exposed surfaces in a wide range of colors including lighter and darker shades of these colors which may be selected on various surfaces, if not included in the following codes (also note, the below listed may be included in the requirements of Section 099700 – Special Coatings):
1. Safety Color Codes: Comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards, as applicable, regarding safety color codes.
2. Piping Color Codes: Colors for process pipe coding shall be as specified in Section 099700 – Special Coatings.
B. A color palate for all proposed final coat colors shall be submitted per Section 013300 – Submittal Review.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and/or coating finishes for conditions that will adversely affect application, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through surface preparation.
B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or painting application until conditions are suitable.
C. If surfaces are not thoroughly dry or if they cannot be put in proper conditions to receive paint by customary cleaning methods, the painting applicators shall notify the ENGINEER in writing, requesting necessary corrections.
D. Review the specified or approved painting systems and bring any questions or doubts as to the proper performance to the ENGINEER. Otherwise, assume the responsibility for providing the desired results.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A. The commencement of painting work in any area or space will be construed as acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of dust, rust, mill scale, loose paint or oily materials.
2. References to SSPC refer to Steel Structures Painting Council specifications.
3. Surfaces shall be primed and/or treated, as specified, as soon after completion of surface preparation as practical, but in any event before any visible or detrimental corrosion or contamination can occur. A prepared surface, which becomes corroded or contaminated, shall be re-prepared before treating and/or priming.
B. Non-submerged Non-Galvanized Structural Steel: All new non-galvanized structural steel for nonsubmerged service shall have their surfaces prepared according to SSPC-SP6-63, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
C. Submerged Non-Galvanized Structural Steel: All new non-galvanized structural steel and fabricated metals for submerged service of high temperature service shall have their surfaces prepared according to SSPC-SP10-63T Near White Metal Blast Cleaning.
D. Unprimed Metal Surfaces: All unprimed metal surfaces and miscellaneous fabricated metals (exclusive of structural steel and galvanized metal) to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned according to SSPC-SP2-63 Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3-63 Power Tool Cleaning, unless specifically required elsewhere in these Specifications. 428
PAINTING 09 9100 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Non-Ferrous Metals: Non-ferrous metals surface preparation shall be not less than that required by the paint manufacturer.
F. Concrete and Masonry:
1. All concrete and masonry surfaces shall be cleaned and free from loose particles.
2. Concrete floors to be painted shall be etched with a 10 percent solution of muriatic acid. If the concrete surface is exceedingly dense, a greater strength acid or a second etching will be required. After etching for a minimum of 30 minutes, wash thoroughly with water to remove all traces of acid. Allow to thoroughly dry at least 72 hours.
3. Submerged concrete to be coated shall have their surfaces prepared by a light sandblast (Brush Blast), to remove loose coating and provide a textured surface to enhance adherence of the new coating. No sandblasting shall be done on the job in areas containing pumps, motors or other equipment that could be damaged by infiltration of sand particles.
G. Wood Surfaces: Wood surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter and all cracks, nail holes, and other defects properly filled and smoothes. Wood trim shall be sanded to fine finish and wiped clean of dust.
3.04 SHOP PRIMING
A. The requirements Specification Section 099700 will govern over this Specification Section requirements.
B. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the equipment manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all paint materials supplied in the shop and field.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mill thickness required. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies of film thickness shall be corrected.
B. On masonry, the application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded.
C. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate of by applying additional coats of paint.
D. Evenly brush out each finish coat and permit to dry per manufacturer's recommendation before applying any subsequent coats.
E. All paints and catalogs shall be maintained at a minimum manufacturer's application temperature before applying.
F. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to a darker shade than the finish coat.
G. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface.
H. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to facilitate inspection. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.
429
PAINTING 09 9100 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
I. All surfaces to be painted as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be done shall be maintained at the conditions recommended by manufacturer by heating and ventilating, if necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint shall be removed and the surface repainted.
J. Perform all required back priming work before items are installed.
3.06 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS
A. Following completion of painting in each space, promptly reinstall all items removed for painting, using only workmen skilled in the particular trade.
3.07 CLEANING
A. During the progress of Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items except in areas specifically reserved for that purpose.
B. Take all precautions to prevent accidental spillage of paint materials. In the event of spilling, immediately remove all spilled materials and the waste and other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash surfaces to their original undamaged condition.
C. Touch-up and restore finish where damaged.
D. Remove all trash and accumulated materials of a painting nature from premises at the completion of the Work.
E. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed. Any damage to Work of other trades or equipment caused from painting shall be made good at no additional expense.
F. Do not mark surface finish of items being cleaned.
G. Leave entire job clean (including paint storage space).
3.08 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Protect all painted surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance of the Work.
B. Conduct a final inspection of all painting work and repaint or retouch any areas or surfaces found deficient in complying with these Specifications.
END OF SECTION 09 9100
430
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 09 9700 - SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required for accomplishing special coatings on fabrications, building elements, mechanical equipment, tanks and piping in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.02 SPECIAL NOTICE
A. Because there exists in this project corrosive agents in the liquids and, in certain areas, in the atmosphere, special coatings for protecting the select equipment, structures, and appurtenances are required. The service requirements of the coatings are harsh and only products with an extended history of successful application will be acceptable.
B. Wherever detailed coating/painting requirements are covered under an equipment or product specification, the Specifications herein, shall govern over those coating requirements, with respect to surface preparation, coat materials, coats, thickness and coverage, with the exception of manufacturer’s supplied coatings and protection. Determine if the manufacturer’s supplied coatings are adequate.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Specified products are those manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., and are specified as the standard of quality. Products are listed to establish a minimum standard of quality. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers (Sherwin Williams, or equal), that meet the specification requirements may be submitted. As part of the proof of quality and performance equivalency, the Engineer will require, certified test reports to be included in the product submittals. Test reports shall be from a nationally known, reputable and independent testing laboratory conducting comparative tests between the product specified and the requested substitution.
B. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each product giving name, product number, and generic type, descriptive information, solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test reports showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products specified herein. All materials must meet all local, state and Federal regulations including and not limited to the project’s local Air Quality Management District. In addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in which each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 013300 - Submittals.
B. Color palette shall be provided for approval for all exposed finish coats.
1.05 ITEMS REQUIRING SPECIAL COATING
A. See Coating Schedules as listed in PART 2 – PRODUCTS.
1.06 ITEMS NOT REQUIRING SPECIAL COATING
A. The metal surfaces of stainless steel, chromium plate, galvanized and aluminum that are not now coated will not require field coating. Do not apply coating over any code-required labels, glass items, gauges and name plates. It is also important not to coat any moving parts or operating units, valves or stems, or any mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages. It is the contactor’s responsibility to protect any surface that is not to receive a coating. 431
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Coaters: All coating shall be done by qualified, skilled and experienced craftsmen.
In the acceptance or rejection of completed coating, no allowance will be made for lack of skills on the part of the craftsmen.
1. SSPC-QP-1 Certified- Field Application to Complex Industrial and Marine Structures
2. SSPC-QP-3 Certified- Shop Painting Certification
B. Coating Labels: Labels on coating containers shall include the following:
1. Manufacturer’s name
2. Generic type of coat
3. Manufacturer’s stock number
4. Color
5. Instructions for thinning where applicable
C. Field Quality Control: Coating film thickness shall be subject to measurement with electrometer, wet film gauge, low or high voltage meter and/or applicable measuring instruments acceptable to the ENGINEER. If dry film thickness is found to be less than specified, or coverage is not uniform, an additional coating to correct thickness or appearance at no additional cost shall be applied.
D. Compatibility:
1. Compatibility of all coatings used shall be required. A compatible coating will be considered a coat, which precludes adverse effects related to bonding, drying delamination, scaling, lifting and bleeding.
2. In cases where shop-applied primers and coatings on materials and equipment furnished by suppliers are products different from those described in the Specifications, compatibility with the specified field-applied coating system shall be verified by the Contractor.
3. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the coating, and products for thinning purposes only, will be allowed.
E. Thickness and Spreading Rates:
1. Minimum dry mil thickness per coat (MDMTPC) and/or spreading rates in square feet per gallon shall be governed by the manufacturer’s current data sheets or literature containing recommendations or instructions regarding these values. These recommended dry mil thickness and/or spreading rate values will be considered requirements to be met same as if set out herein; these Do Not exceed manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates.
2. The number of coats to be applied are specified herein and shall govern. Where the total dry film thickness is specified, this thickness shall govern over the MDMTPC.
1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery: All materials shall be brought to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the coating manufacturer. All labels shall be legible and intact at time of use.
B. Manufacturer’s Instruction: Coating manufacturer’s written instructions for proper surface preparation, mixing, thinning, application and drying shall be furnished with the coating and strictly followed.
C. Storage of Materials:
1. Store only acceptable materials on project site.
2. Store only in a suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of coating materials and related equipment.
3. Comply with all applicable health and fire regulations regarding the storage of coating materials.
4. Storage of material shall comply with the manufacturer’s specifications; however, storage shall be at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.
432
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
D. Protection of Materials:
1. Take all necessary precautions to ensure the safe storage and use of coating materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste.
2. Coating wastes shall be properly deposited in containers made for this purpose.
3. Take all necessary precautions to protect coating materials before, during and after application and to protect the finished work.
E. Replacement: In the event of damage to coating materials, immediately make all replacements necessary to the approval of the ENGINEER and at no additional cost.
F. Product delivery, handling and storage shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.
2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust and/or mist is being generated.
B. Climatic Conditions: Coating shall not be applied if:
1. The ambient temperature or temperature of the surface to be coated is below 50 degrees F or below the temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer.
2. The relative humidity is above 85 percent.
3. The relative humidity is such that the coating will not dry properly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Protection:
1. Protect with drop cloths, masking or other acceptable means all surfaces which could be damaged in function or appearance by coating, including surfaces not being coated concurrently and surfaces not to be coated.
2. Hardware, accessories, fixtures and similar items shall be removed and replaced after completion of coating.
3. Spray coating will not be permitted when it will cause damage to adjacent or otherwise located surfaces.
4. All coating splatters on glass shall be wiped off immediately.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COATING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL - STRUCTURAL, TANKS, ROOF DECKING, PIPE, AND
EQUIPMENT
A. Exterior Exposed:
1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
4. Intermediate Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT.
6. Total DFT: 9.5 to 14.5 mils.
B. Interior Exposed:
1. System Type: Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
5. Total DFT: 7.0 to 11.0 mils.
433
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Immersion:
1. System Type: Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
4. Intermediate Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
5. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
6. Total DFT: 11.0 to 16.0 mils.
D. Interior/Immersion, Severe Exposure to H2S:
1. System Type: Modified Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 5 with minimum 3.0-mil profile.
3. Primer/Finish (One or More Coats): Series 435 Perma-Glaze; 30.0 to 36.0 mils DFT.
4. Total DFT: 30.0 to 36.0 mils.
E. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Interior):
1. System Type: Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
F. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Exterior):
1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series 135 Chembuild; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat (Exterior): Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT
5. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils.
G. Below Ground (Heat and Corrosion Resistant):
1. System Type: Silicone Resin and Zinc Dust.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Thurmalox 210 Air Dry Silicone Zinc Dust Primer; 2.0 to 2.5 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat (Exterior): Thurmalox Series 200; 2.0 to 2.5 mils. DFT
5. Total DFT: 4.0 to 5.0 mils.
H. Fusion Bonded Epoxy Lining System (MLSS EQ):
The coating / lining material shall be a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in accordance with the ANSI/AWWA C213 "AWWA Standard for Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines", except that the surface preparation shall be as specified in the coating system schedule of this Section. The coating shall be applied using the fluidized bed process.
1. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs or where, as confirmed by the Engineer, it would be impossible to use the powder epoxy method without causing damage to the item, the use of a liquid epoxy will be permitted, applied in not less than 3 coats to provide a DFT of 15 mils. The liquid epoxy shall be a 100 percent solids epoxy recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer.
2. Coating (Min DFT = 16 mils), Scotchkote 206N, 134N, SW Pipeclad 2000, or equal.
3. Total system DFT = 16 mils.
2.02 COATING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL – STRUCTURAL BEAMS/COLUMNS, STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS, DECKING AND ROOF DECKING.
A. Exterior Exposed:
1. System Type: Aromatic Urethane Zinc rich Primer/Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation for all abrasive blasting on steel for new construction is recommended to provide an SSPC SP-10 near white. This recommendation is based on all mill scales, and other deposits are removed. 434
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3. Primer: Series 90-97 Tneme Zinc @ 2.5-3.5 0 mils DFT. 94 H2O for Low VOC
4. Intermediate Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. 1095 for Low VOC
6. Total DFT: 9.5 to 14.5 mils.
B. Interior Exposed (Building B and Chemical Building-Building H):
1. System Type General: Epoxy.
2. System Type HDG Metal Decking: Duplex system for HDG metal decking – prepared in accordance with ASTM D6386.
2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
4. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
5. Total DFT: 7.0 to 11.0 mils.
C. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Interior):
1. System Type: Inorganic Hybrid water based Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series Series 27 WB Typoxy 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat: Series 27 WB Typoxy 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
6. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
E. Marginally Prepared Surfaces (Maintenance, Non-Immersion, Exterior):
1. System Type: Inorganic Hybrid Water Based Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series Series 27 WB Typoxy 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
4. Finish Coat (Exterior): Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT 1095 for Low VOC
5. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils.
2.02 COATING SYSTEMS FOR FACTORY PRIMED STEEL - DOORS, FRAMES, AND
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Interior Exposed:
1. System Type: Acrylic
2. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry.
3. Primer: Factory primed.
4. Field Primer: Series 115 Uni Bond DF; 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
5. Finish Coat: Series 1029 Enduratone; 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT
6. Total DFT: 4.0 to 6.0 mils (on top of shop primer).
B. Exterior Exposed:
1. System Type: Inorganic Hybrid Water Based Epoxy/Polyurethane
2. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry.
3. Primer: Factory primed.
4. Field Primer: Series 27 Typoxy WB ; 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
5. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT 1095 for Low VOC
6. Total DFT: 5.5 to 8.5 mils (on top of shop primer).
2.03 COATING SYSTEMS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Interior Exposure:
1. System Type: Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
4. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
435
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Exterior Exposure:
1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
4. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. 1095 for Low VOC
5. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils
C. Below Ground:
1. System Type: Coal tar epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Prime/Finish Coat: Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar; 14.0 to 20.0 mils DFT. Series 27 WB Typoxy for Low VOC.
4. Total DFT: 14.0 to 20.0 mils
D. Immersion, Severe Exposure to H2S (Includes Piping in Trench at Building B and at North Process Structure)
1. System type: Modified Polyamine Ceramic Epoxy
2. Surface preparation: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
3. Primer/Finish (One or more coats): Series 431 Perma Glaze; 30-40 mils DFT
4. Total DFT: 30-36 mils.
2.04 COATING SYSTEMS FOR PVC
A. Interior Exposure:
1. System Type: Epoxy.
2. Surface Preparation: Scarify
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
4. Finish Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
5. Total DFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
B. Exterior Exposure:
1. System Type: Epoxy/Polyurethane.
2. Surface Preparation: Scarify.
3. Primer: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. L69 for Low VOC
4. Finish Coat: Series 1075 Endura-Shield II; 2.5 to 3.5 mils. DFT. 1095 for Low VOC
5. Coating provided shall contain UV inhibitor.
2.05 COATING SYTEMS FOR CONCRETE SITE MANHOLES, HEADWORKS/GRIT REMOVAL
STRUCTURE
NOTE: Coating applications and total thickness shall be coordinated by the contractor for use with the headworks and grit removal equipment, providing proper clearances and tolerances as required by the equipment manufacturer for the channel installed equipment.
A. System Type: Epoxy Cementitious Resurfacer/Aggregate-Reinforced Epoxy/100% Solids Epoxy System
B. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6. Abrasive blast clean to texture of 50 to 60 grit sandpaper.
C. Primer/Resurfacer Coat: Tnemec Series 218 MortarClad at 1/16”–1/8” DFT (nominal 62.5-125 mils).
1) Voids larger than 1/8” depth shall be patched using Series 217 MortarCrete and re-prepared prior to Series 218 application.
D. Intermediate Coat: Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S; 1/8 inch DFT (nominal 125 mils) E. Finish Coat: Series 435 Perma-Glaze; 20.0 mils DFT.
436
SPECIAL COATINGS 09 9700 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.06 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CMU – SEE ALSO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR COATING
SYSTEMS
B. Fill concrete masonry unit surfaces with block filler, except interior surfaces to be painted with latex (which do not need to be filled).
C. Interior concrete block walls: Epoxy based, masonry compatible system D. Exterior concrete block walls: Block Sealer (painted where indicated) E. Concrete block filler: Tnemec, Series 130-6601, or equal F. Block sealer: Masterbuilders, Masterseal SL, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. SSPC/NACE QC Inspection Standards
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coating for conditions that will adversely affect application, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through surface preparation.
C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A. The commencement of coating work in any area or space will be construed as acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory. Acceptance of surfaces shall be accepted by either Liberty Inspection NACE Level 2 or 3 or 3rd Party NACE Level 3 which will require “hold points” for QA/QC of surface preparation and all coating applications.
3.03 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Preparation and application shall be in accordance with coating systems (Part 2).
3.04 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Protect all coated surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance.
B. Conduct a final inspection of all coating work and recoat or retouch any areas or surfaces found deficient in complying with these Specifications.
END OF SECTION 09 9700
437
SIGNAGE 101400 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE
PART1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Includes all labor, materials, and equipment required to install room signage as noted on drawings and specified herein. It is the intention of the signage requirement to have one sign at each interior door or room.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 013300 for all work under this Section. Contractor shall submit layouts and schedules of each type of signage.
B. Submit color samples for Owner approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Wall Mounted Room Names and Numbers
1. Signage shall be one piece photo etched raised letter borderless glass plaques with radius corners, 4" x 8", laminated to an opaque acrylic 1/8" thick backing.
2. All signs shall have characters on contrasting background (color selected by Owner) and shall meet ADA and ANSI A117.1 Standards for raised letter and braille characters and pictorial symbol signs.
3. Braille to comply with specification #800 National Library Service, National Library of Congress specifications for standard literary braille.
4. Signage shall utilize upper case Palatino style of lettering, black in color.
5. Finish materials shall be durable and stain resistant.
B. Mounting system shall utilize a silastic adhesive mounting system with vinyl foam adhesive tape supplied to hold the sign in place until silastic is fully cured.
C. Room name signage shall be mounted at the exterior side of each door.
1. Refer to Room finish schedule, door schedule, and floor plan for complete listing of rooms.
2. Prior to fabrication, verify room name schedule with Owner.
D. Toilet Room signage shall include pictorial symbol sign for men and women handicap use and be door mounted to comply with ADA requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Install room sign units 4" from the latch side of the door, 5'-0" above finish floor to bottom of sign.
Securely mount with adhesive. Attach signs to substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install all signage level, plumb, and at proper heights. Cooperate with other trades for installation of sign units to finish surfaces. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10 1400
438
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 11 10 00 – EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment and appurtenances required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of the equipment shown within the Contract Documents is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer in all cases. Some aspects of the Drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment arrangement may require revision to meet the actual equipment requirements. Structural supports, foundations, piping and valve connections, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each equipment specification:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3. American Society of Mechanical Owners (ASME)
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Owners (ASHRAE)
6. American Welding Society (AWS)
7. Mechanical Power Transmission Association (MPTA)
8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
9. Federal Specifications (FS)
10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
11. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications.
12. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA)
13. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
B. The following standards are referenced in this Section:
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy and other Special Alloys
ANSI B46.1 Surface Texture
ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors
ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch)
ASME B31.1 Power Piping
AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. (100 mm through 3,600 mm)
ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality 439
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete drawings and technical information for equipment, piping, valves, and controls. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements.
C. Spare Parts List: A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished. This list shall contain all data necessary to allow the OWNER to purchase spare parts as necessary.
D. Anchorage Forces and Members Calculations: As required by the Town or the Engineer, the Contractor shall work with the manufacturer to include anchorage force calculations (including applicable seismic forces) for the specified equipment and the corresponding anchorage bolts/members verifying the supplied anchorage components can satisfy the required anchorage forces. The calculations shall be clear and concise and shall be signed and stamped by a licensed engineer in the State of California.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: The local authorities shall be informed to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, safety systems, and related items.
B. Quality and Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to.
1. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30 feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30 feet in length.
2. Castings shall be homogeneous and free from non-metallic inclusions and defects. Surfaces of castings which are not machined shall be cleaned to remove foundry irregularities. Casting defects not exceeding 12.5 percent of the total thickness and where defects will not affect the strength and serviceability of the casting may be repaired by approved welding procedures.
If the removal of metal for repair reduces the stress-resisting cross-section of the casting by more than 25 percent or to such an extent that the computed stress in the remaining metal exceeds the allowable stress by more than 25 percent, then the casting may be rejected.
3. All materials shall meet the physical and mechanical properties in accordance with the reference standards.
C. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used:
1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact.
2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required.
3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces.
4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches.
1.5 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Spare parts shall be furnished as indicated in the individual equipment sections. All spare parts shall be suitably packaged in the original manufacturer's box and labeled clearly with equipment numbers and name tags attached to the box.
440
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Special tools shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and directions shall be provided for intended use.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Level: When in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed the OSHA noise level requirement of 105 dBA for one-hour exposure per day without sound enclosure or sound dampening devices.
B. High Noise Level Location: One personal hearing protection station at each high noise level location shall be provided. Locations are defined as follows:
1. Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 feet, measured between edges of footings, each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station.
2. Indoor Location
a. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure.
b. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure.
C. Personal Hearing Protection: Three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging shall be provided. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have ear cushions and a variable, padded headband.
D. Drive Trains and Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. All components of drive train assemblies between the prime mover and the driven equipment shall be designed and rated to deliver the maximum peak or starting torque, speed, and horsepower. All of the applicable service factors shall be considered, such as mechanical (type of prime mover), load class, start frequency, ventilation, ambient temperature, and fan factors. Drive train components include couplings, shafts, gears and gear drives, drive chains, sprockets, and V-belt drives. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors:
Type of Equipment Service Factor Load Classification
Reciprocating Air Compressors:
Multi-Cylinder
Single-Cylinder
2.0 2.0
Heavy Shock
Heavy Shock
Pumps:
Centrifugal or Rotary
Reciprocating
1.0 1.8
Uniform
Moderate Shock
Cranes or Hoists 1.25 Moderate Shock
E. Mechanical Service Factors:
Electric Motor Internal Combustion Engine
Uniform 1.25 1.50
Moderate Shock 1.50 1.75
Heavy Shock 2.00 2.25
441
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. For thermal rating adjustments such as start frequency, ambient temperature, and hourly duty cycle factor, ventilation factor, and fan factor, refer to gear manufacturer sizing information.
G. For service factors of electric motors, see Division 26 – Electrical.
H. Where load classifications are not indicated, service factors based on AGMA 514.02 shall be used for standard load classifications and service factors for flexible couplings, I. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, welding shall conform to the following:
1. Latest revision of AWWA D100.
2. Latest revision of AWWA C206.
3. Composite fabricated steel assemblies that are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture.
4. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards.
5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material that is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat.
J. Protective Coating: Equipment shall be painted and coated in accordance with the intended application, Section 09 9100 – Painting, and Section 09 9700 – Special Coatings, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number for the particular item.
L. Vibration Isolators: Air compressors, blowers, engines, inline fans shall be provided with restrained spring-type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations.
M. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Shop Drawings.
N. Controls: Equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Division 26 – Electrical and Division 40 – Process Integration.
2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in the general structural notes or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Equipment Foundations: Mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch-high concrete bases, where indicated.
Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment shall be verified through the equipment manufacturer. 442
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.3 COUPLINGS
A. Mechanical couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, coupling type shall be furnished with the respective equipment as follows:
Equipment Type Coupling Type
Air Compressors / Air Blowers Belt, gear, or flexible disc pack B. Each coupling size shall be determined based on the rated horsepower of the motor, speed of the shaft, and the load classification service factor. The equipment manufacturer shall select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application.
C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.
D. Taper-Lock or ENGINEER-approved equal bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal of shafts of various diameters.
2.4 SHAFTING
A. General: Shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. Shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true.
B. Design Criteria: All shafts shall be designed to carry the steady state and transient loads suitable for unlimited number of load applications, in accordance with ASME B106.1M, - Design of Transmission Shafting. Where shafts are subjected to fatigue stresses, such as frequent start and stop cycles, the mean stress shall be determined by using the modified Goodman Diagram. The maximum torsional stress shall not exceed the endurance limit of the shaft after application of the factor of safety of 2 in the endurance limit and the stress concentration factor of the fillets in the shaft and keyway. Stress concentration factor shall be in accordance with ASME Standard B17.1 - Keys and Keyseats.
C. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted.
Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly.
1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A108, Grade 1018.
2. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A108, Grade 1045.
3. Other grades of carbon steel alloys shall be suitable for service and load.
4. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service.
D. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.
2.5 V-BELT DRIVES
A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron.
C. Sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction.
D. Finish bored sheaves shall be complete with keyseat and setscrews. 443
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Sliding motor bases or auto-tension, spring suspension shall be provided to adjust the tension of Vbelts.
2.6 DRIVE GUARDS
A. Power transmission trains, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the Division of Industrial Safety General Industrial Safety Orders latest edition. The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10-gauge expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and corners, galvanized after fabrication, and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors.
2.7 BEARINGS
A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).
B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and lubrication shall be considered in bearing selection.
C. Re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber.
D. Lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance.
E. Anti-Friction Type Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so indicated, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows:
Type of Service
Design Life (years) L-10 Design Life (hours)
(whichever comes first)
8-hour shift 10 20,000
16-hour shift 10 40,000
Continuous 10 60,000
F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly.
G. Sleeve Type Bearings: Sleeve-type bearings shall have a cast iron or ductile iron housing and Babbitt or bronze liner. Bearing housing shall be bolted and doweled to the lower casing half.
These housings shall be provided with cast iron caps bolted in place and the bearing end caps shall be bored to receive the bearing shells. Sleeve bearings shall be designed on the basis of the maximum allowable load permitted by the bearing manufacturer. If the sleeve bearing is connected to an equipment shaft with a coupling, the coupling transmitted thrust will be assumed to be the maximum motor or equipment thrust. Lubricant, lubrication system, and cooling system shall be as recommended by the bearing manufacturer.
H. Plate Thrust Bearings: Thrust bearings shall be the Kingsbury Type, designed and manufactured to maintain the shaft in the fixed axial position without undue heating or the necessity of adjustment or attention. Bearings shall be oil lubricated to suit the manufacturer's standard method of lubrication for the specific bearing. If bearing cooling is required, manufacturer shall provide necessary piping, filters, and valves.
2.8 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Guides: Pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 40 0507 – Hangers and Supports for Process Piping. 444
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment and appurtenances shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 and Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.
C. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping. Flexible connectors shall be harnessed or otherwise anchored to prevent separation of the pipe where required by the installation.
D. Insulating Connections: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.
2.9 GASKETS AND PACKINGS
A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.
B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane "Everseal," or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer, in accordance with Section 46 0600 – Submersible Wastewater Pumps.
2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings.
2.11 EQUIPMENT LUBRICANTS
A. Lubricants for all equipment during storage and prior to initial testing of the equipment shall be installed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by individual Sections, an authorized, experienced, and competent service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness or perform the following in accordance with Section 01 4333 – Manufacturer’s Field Services and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.
1. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment and approving its installation.
2. Startup and field testing for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity.
3. Performing field adjustments during the test period to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements.
4. Instruct plant operating personnel on proper operations, maintenance, and care.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment. 445
EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 1000 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.3 PRE-PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
A. Coordination of all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs shall be required to avoid later change orders, when any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment.
3.4 WELDING
A. Welds shall be cleaned of weld-slag, splatter, etc. to provide a smooth surface. Metal brushes shall be the same material as the metal welded. Stainless steel brushes shall be used for cleaning stainless steel welds.
3.5 FIELD TESTS
A. Where indicated by the individual equipment Sections, equipment shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating of bearings or motor.
B. The following field testing shall be conducted:
1. Start equipment, check, and operate the equipment over its entire operating range. Vibration level shall be within the amplitude limits as indicated or as recommended by the reference applicable Standards.
2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, capacity, vibration and bearing temperatures.
C. In the event that any equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the equipment shall be modified and retested until it satisfies the requirement.
END OF SECTION 11 1000
446
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 13 3419 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide a pre-engineered building per the following specification. Building manufacturer shall provide structural design drawings and calculations stamped by a registered professional engineer in the State of California for approval by the ENGINEER. These specifications are an outline of performance to insure that the architect, engineer, builder and/or owner understand the basis for design, manufacture and application of this pre-engineered metal building.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 - Metals
2. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
3. Division 08 – Openings
4. Division 16 – Electrical
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Indicate all dimensions, type, and gauge or thickness, and shape of all components.
C. Describe type and method of all finishes.
D. Indicate type, size, location and spacing of all fasteners, anchorage, and building components.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Pre-engineered building shall utilize the standard specifications of industry recognized organizations, such as: AISC, AWS, ASTM, AISI, and MBMA.
1.5 BUILDING NOMENCLATURE
A. Building “Width” and “Length” shall be measured from the inside face to the inside face of the wall covering.
B. Building “Eave Height” shall be measured from the bottom of the base plate of the frame columns to the intersection of lines representing the inside of the wall covering and the inside of the roof covering.
C. The “Bay Spacing” shall be measured center line to center line of the main frames, except at end bays where “Bay Spacing” is measured from the inside of the wall covering to the center line of the first interior frame.
1.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. Prefabricated steel building manufacturers shall be Rigid Global Buildings, or Equal.
1.7 DESIGN INFORMATION
1. The building dimensions (feet) are as follows: 12’ x 20’ x 10’ eave height.
2. Design wind velocity: 100 mph
3. Lowest one-day mean ambient temperature: + 32 F
4. Highest one-day mean ambient temperature: + 110 F
5. Allowable soil bearing pressure shall be per the Geotechnical Report/Soils Investigation by LOR Geotechnical Group, Inc.
1.8 SEISMIC DESIGN
1. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.0
447
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Seismic Use Group: II-Normal
3. Site Class: D
4. Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration: Ss = 1.446, S1: 0.600
5. Spectral Response Coefficients: Sds = 0.964, Sd1 = 0.600
6. Design: Rigid Frame, Braced Frame
a. Vertical acceleration deferred to manufacturer
b. Live and Dead loads deferred to manufacturer
c. Column lateral wave load deferred to manufacturer
d. Column horizontal acceleration deferred to manufacturer
7. Pressure stability: yes for seismic loading
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. PRIMARY FRAMING shall be the main load carrying structural members. These members shall support secondary structural members.
B. RIGID FRAME “RF” shall normally be manufactured of solid web members having tapered or uniform depth rafters, rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth columns. This system provides a clear span, single gable, or single sloped rigid frame designed to support the specified loads.
C. STRAIGHT COLUMN “SC” shall normally be manufactured of solid web members having tapered or uniform depth rafters, rigidly connected to uniform depth columns. This system provides clear span, single gable or single sloped rigid frame, straight column designed to support the specified loads.
D. BEAM and COLUMN “BC” shall normally be manufactured of solid web members having tapered and/or uniform depth rafters, rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth exterior columns, and uniform depth or round section interior columns. This system provides a single gable, or single slope rigid frame having interior columns designed to support the specified loads.
E. MATERIALS used in the fabrication of primary framing systems shall be designed utilizing building manufacturer’s standard practices, and in compliance with the AISC code.
1. STRUCTURAL FLAT PLATE, STRIP and/or BAR STOCK shall conform to the physical requirements of ASTM A529 or ASTM A572 as applicable, and shall have minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi for web plates and 55,000 psi for flange bars.
2. W, M and S SHAPES, ANGLE RODS, CHANNELS and OTHER HOT ROLLED SHAPES shall be of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A572 or ASTM A992, and shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
5. ROUND PIPE SECTIONS shall be of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A500 Grade B and shall have minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi.
6. STRUCTURAL TUBING shall be of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM 500 Grade B and shall have a minimum yield strength of 46,000 psi.
7. OTHER YIELD STRENGTH MATERIALS may be used based on the particular building design requirements.
8. MEMBERS fabricated from plate or bar stock materials shall have flanges and webs joined on one side of the web by a submerged arc continuous weld process.
2.2 PRIMARY ENDWALL FRAMING
A. PRIMARY ENDWALL FRAMING shall be the main load carrying members of the building endwall. They shall include the corner columns, endwall columns and endwall rafters, and shall be manufactured of cold-formed light gage sections and/or structural sections.
B. BEARING FRAME “BF” shall be a system having a continuous rafter beam supported by corner columns and endwall columns, and shall be designed to support the specified loads. This is a nonexpandable endwall. 448
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. HALF LOAD MAIN FRAMES shall be a system similar to the mainframes described in section
2.1, except that these main-frames are designed as non-expandable endwalls.
D. MATERIALS used in the fabrication of primary endwall framing systems shall be designed utilizing building manufacturer’s standard practices, and in compliance with the applicable sections of AISC and AISI.
1. COLD-FORMED MEMBERS shall be fabricated from material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A653, structural steel Grade 50 or ASTM A1011 structural steel or high strength low alloy steel Grade 55. Either material shall be required to have a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.
2. STRUCTURAL SHAPES shall be of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A572 or ASTM A992, and shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
3. OTHER YIELD STRENGTH MATERIALS may be used based on the particular building design requirements.
4. MEMBERS fabricated from plate or bar stock materials shall have flanges and web joined by a submerged are continuous weld process on one side only.
2.3 SECONDARY FRAMING
A. SECONDARY FRAMING shall be the structural members which distribute the loads to the primary framing systems, and shall include the eave struts, purlins, girts, wind bracing and other miscellaneous structural members. They shall be manufactured of cold-formed light gage sections, welded plate sections and/or structural sections.
B. EAVE STRUTS shall be nominal 4”, 6”, 8”, 9”, 10” or 12” deep “cee” shape members of unequal flange manufactured of cold-formed light gage steel and shall be designed as simple span for the specified loads.
C. PURLINS AND GIRTS shall be nominal 4”, 6”, 8”, 9”, 10” or 12” deep “zee” shaped or “cee” shaped members, and shall be manufactured of cold-formed light gage steel designed as simple span, partially continuous or continuous for the specific loads.
D. WIND BRACING shall be a system of bracing designed for the specified loads in accordance with building manufacturer’s design practices. They normally utilize rods, cables, diaphragm action, angles and/or welded plate or structural members.
E. MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING shall normally be those members which work in conjunction with primary, primary endwall and secondary framing systems. They shall include members such as:
base angles, flange braces, jambs, headers, bridging, or sag members, and shall be designed to be supportive of the framing systems.
F. MATERIALS using in the fabrication of secondary framing systems shall be designed utilizing building manufacturer’s standard practices, and in compliance with the applicable sections of AISC and AISI.
1. COLD-FORMED MEMBERS shall be fabricated from material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A653, structural steel Grade 50 or ASTM A1011 structural steel or high strength low alloy steel Grade 55. Either material shall be required to have a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.
2. CABLE BRACING shall be fabricated of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A475, 7-Strands, Extra High Strength grade.
3. ROD BRACING shall be fabricated of material conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM A36 and shall have a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi.
4. OTHER YIELD STRENGTH MATERIALS shall be used based on the particular building design requirements.
5. MEMBERS fabricated from plate or bar stock materials shall have flanges and webs joined on one side of the web by submerged arc continuous weld process. 449
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.4 ROOF COVERING
A. ROOF COVERING shall consist of the roof panels, their attachments, trim and sealant for use on the exterior of the roof.
B. Roof panels shall provide a 36” wide net coverage having 1 1/4” high major ribs at 12” centers and two minor ribs between the major ribs. Side laps shall be one full major rib and shall utilize the bearing edge of the underlying major rib for support. Panels shall be continuous from ridge to eave until panel length exceeds 40’ and/or the panel becomes prohibitive of handling in which case endlaps are provided. Endlaps shall be 6” and occur over a supporting member.
C. Roof covering systems shall be designed for 4”maximum blanket insulation thickness over the purlins.
D. Roof panels shall normally be unfinished Aluminum-Zinc alloy-coated (Galvalume) steel substrate or a pre-finished Silicon Polyester Polar White finish over Aluminum-Zinc alloy-coated or G90 zinc-coated galvanized steel substrate in accordance with ASTM A792, Grade 80 (26 gage) or Grade 50 (24 gage) or ASTM A653, Grade 80 (26 gage).
2.5 WALL COVERING
A. WALL COVERING shall consist of the wall panels, their attachments, and trim for use on the exterior of the walls.
B. MATERIALS used in the fabrication of the commercial roof and wall trim and flashing shall normally be a pre-finished Modified Silicon Polyester finish over Aluminum-Zinc alloy-coated or G90 galvanized steel substrate in accordance with ASTM A792, Grade 50 (24 & 26 gage) or ASTM A653, Grade 50 (26 gage). Manufacturer shall provide a color chart for color availability.
2.6 PAINTED FINISHES
A. PAINTED FINISHES for roof and wall coverings and their flashing shall unless otherwise specified, consists of 0.2 mil baked on primer coat applied to each side. A 0.8 mil baked-on finish coat will be applied on one side, while a 0.3 mil baked-on straight polyester wash coat will be applied on the other. Total thickness of the finish coat side will be nominal 1.0 mil (including the primer coat). Thickness of the backside will be a nominal 0.5 mil (including the primer coat).
2.7 SYSTEMS COVERING SEALANTS
A. SYSTEMS COVERING SEALANTS shall normally be roll tape sealant, tube sealant, and closures as required for weather-tightness of the roof.
1. TAPE SEALANTS shall be of performed butyl rubber base, and shall normally be supplied as a 3/32” x 1/2” extruded shape. Wide tape sealant, 3/32” x 1” shall be available if specified.
2. TUBE SEALANTS shall be of a polyurethane type material for applications where color sealant is required. Clear tube sealants shall be of an acrylic type material.
3. CLOSURES shall be a closed cell polyethylene material of a gray neutral color, and shall be die cut to panel profiles. Closures shall be supplied as required to provide weather tightness.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. FASTENERS for roof and wall covering systems shall normally be one or more types of selfdrilling or self-tapping screws. Blind rivets shall normally be used in trim and accessory attachment and trim splicing.
2.9 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS shall normally be fabricated by shearing, flame cutting, forming, welding, punching, drilling, reaming, etc.
B. WELDED PLATE MEMBERS fabricated from plate or bar stock materials shall have flanges and webs joined on the one side of the web by a submerged arc continuous weld process. 450
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. SHOP CONNECTIONS for built-up and/or hot-rolled members shall normally be welded using either a submerged or gas metal arc weld process. Welding shall be in accordance with industry standard practices in compliance with the applicable sections, relating to design requirements and allowable stresses of the latest edition of the “AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1”.
D. FIELD CONNECTIONS shall normally be the bolting of structural members using high strength bolts and machine bolts in shop drilled, punched or reamed holes.
E. WORKMANSHIP AND TOLERANCES of the manufactured building parts shall be in accordance with industry quality control standards.
F. SHOP PAINTING of members with shop primer paint shall be provided for the purpose of protecting the steel member during transportation, job site storage, and during erection. Shop primer does not provide the appearance, durability and/or protection of an appropriate field applied finish. Building manufacturer is not responsible for any deterioration of the shop primer paint as a result of improper handling and/or storage. Building manufacturer shall not be responsible for any field applied paint and/or coatings.
G. CLEANING of steel members shall normally be the removal of oil, dirt, loose scale and/or foreign matter prior to painting in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
H. COATING of steel members shall normally be one shop coat of industry standard primer paint in accordance with the industry standard practices, and generally shall equal or exceed the end performance requirements of Federal Specifications SSPC # 15.
I. ALL FRAMING MEMBERS shall carry an easily visible identifying painted or stenciled piece mark.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. COIL DOORS – Reference Section 08830.
B. PERSONNEL DOORS shall normally be single door or a double door available in flush panel (solid) or long vision. Half-glass, vision light and louvered doors are available upon request.
C. DOOR LEAF shall be non-handed, 1 3/4” thick, full flush, fabricated from 20 gage roller leveled, galvanized mill bonderized face sheets. Door finishes are white embossed (standard), bronzed embossed, or smooth gray finish. Top and bottom channels shall be welded flush to face sheet. The core materials shall be expanded polystyrene bonded to face sheets with a two component epoxy adhesive. Door edges shall be hemmed to eliminate raw edge metal, beveled on lock side and flat on hinge side. Door shall be prepared for 4 1/2” X 4 1/2” template hinges with 9 gage hinge reinforcements. Lock edges shall be prepared for Government Series 160 and 161 Locksets.
D. DOOR FRAMES shall be fabricated from 16 gage galvanized class G-60 or galvalume steel, mill bonderized. Floor and head clips X 4 1/2’ template and universal striker plate. Frames are standard finished white with gray primer or bronzed finishes available.
E. HARDWARE shall normally consist of: (a) 1 1/2 pair full mortise hinges per leaf (b) one key-inlever type cylindrical lockset (c) one aluminum threshold (d) one astragal, one filler plug for inactive leaf, one header bolt, one foot bolt, and one pair of surface bolts per double door. Optional weather stripping for jambs, head, and sill may be ordered. Optional Mortise lockset, panic hardware, handicap hardware, and door closers may also be ordered.
F. FRAMES OPENINGS IN WALLS shall normally be an opening framed with 16 gage minimum, cold-formed members, designed to meet the specified loads. Openings shall be trimmed in accordance with industry standard practices.
G. FIXED LOUVERS shall be shop fabricated out of 18 gage galvanized steel, self framing, self flashing, and self mulling, welded frames with 20 gage galvanized blades. Louvers shall have blades of the overlapping type, providing maximum weather tightness while allowing free air flow. A removable insect screen shall be provided with each louver. Louvers shall provide a total minimum of 40-50 ft2 of free area.
451
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING 13 3419 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Anchor bolts shall not be less than the size and quantity shown on the building anchor bolt setting drawings. Anchor bolts are unpainted for bonding with concrete, and are of sufficient capacity to properly resist the governing reactions induced by the design loads on the structure. Foundation reactions are furnished by building manufacturer. All anchor bolts are to be set in strict accordance with building drawings. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance with ASTM F1554 and it also meets ASTM A307 Grade C regulations. Additional materials shall be required for compliance.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
1. The erection of the metal building and the installation of accessories shall be performed in accordance with the building manufacturer’s erection manuals and the building erection drawings. The erection shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR or building manufacturer using proper tools and equipment. In addition, erection practices shall conform to Section 4, Common Industry Practices found in the Metal Building Systems Manual, 2006 edition. There shall be no field modifications to primary structural members except as authorized and specified by building manufacturer. It shall be the erector’s responsibility to comply with all appropriate legal and safety requirements. It shall be the erectors responsibility to determine and provide any and all temporary bracing, shoring, blocking, bridging, and/or securing of components, etc., as required during erection of the building.
B. BUILDING ANCHORAGE AND FOUNDATION
1. The building anchor bolts shall resist the maximum column reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. The quantities and diameters shall be specified by building manufacturer. Anchor bolt embedment designs and the anchor bolts shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. The design shall be based on the specific soil conditions of the building site.
C. WARRANTY
1. Pre-Engineered Building, excluding paint, shall carry a warranty against failure due to defective material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. - END OF SECTION 13 3419-
452
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 22 0000 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all drainage and vent piping, cleanouts and access panels, floor drains, hot and cold water piping, valves, piping specialties and appurtenances, supports and anchors, and plumbing and piping insulation in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. See plans for all plumbing related equipment. Install equipment in accordance with the individual equipment/manufacturer requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittals.
B. Product data to be submitted:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.
3. Shop Drawings and other data as required indicating method of installing and attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.
C. Sterilization Certificate: Upon completion of water line sterilization, deliver to the DESIGN/BUILDER two copies of an acceptable “Certificate of Performance” for that activity.
D. Cathodic Protection:
1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the ENGINEER sufficient data to prove that wrapping of steel piping has been tested and meets the specified requirements.
2. Show date of inspection, voltages used, and name and address of the inspector.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experience in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Codes and Regulations:
1. In additions to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the ENGINEER.
3. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the International Plumbing Code pertaining to selection and installation of plumbing materials and products.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with the AHJ Standards, and in accordance with the following listings:
B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings:
1. Service weight cast iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubless type, asphalitic coated.
2. Joints shall be made with cast iron mechanical couplings or stainless steel sleeves with neoprene gaskets.
453
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Galvanized or Black Steel Pipe:
1. 3 inches and Smaller – ASTM A120. Schedule 40, black or hot-dipped galvanized, welded or seamless steel pipe, threaded or coupled.
2. 4 inches and Larger – ASTM A53. Grade A or B, Schedule 40, black or hot dipped galvanized, welded or seamless steel pipe, threaded.
3. Fittings: FS WW-P521, 150 psi, malleable iron. Black or hot dipped galvanized ASTM A153.
4. Unions: FS WW-U-531, Type B, black or hot dipped galvanized, Class 2, 250 psi, malleable iron, ground joint and brass seat.
5. Sealing Paste or Tape: Teflon.
6. Corrosion Protective Wrap: Polyvinyl chloride or Polyethylene pressure sensitive tape, 20- mil nominal thickness (one layer 20 mil or two layers 10 mil).
7. Primer: 3M “Scotchwrap Pipe Primer.”
D. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
1. Pipe: Underground, ANSI/ASTM B88, Type K, hard temper, seamless water tube.
Aboveground, ANSI/ASTM B88, Type L., hard drawn, seamless water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22. Wrought copper or brass solder-joint fittings.
3. Solder: Lead-free, silver tin-antimony solder 95-5, or tin-silver solder 96.5-3.5, 95.5, or 94- 6, with mildly corrosive liquid or petroleum-based past flux containing chlorides of zinc and ammonium.
E. ABS: (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) plastic, drain, waste and vent pipe.
1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2661; ASTM F628; CSA B181.1.
2. 2.Solvent Cement: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
F. Polypropylene Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe:
1. Flame retardant polypropylene material conforming to ASTM D2146 and flammability based on ASTM D635.
2. Pipe shall be produced to Schedule 40 Iron Pipe size dimensional standards, including wall thickness.
3. Fitting design shall be based upon the laying length dimensions in ANSI B16-12 for case iron screwed drainage fittings. Fitting wall thicknesses shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D2122, Section 4, and interval diameters shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D2122, Section 7.
4. In concealed locations, joints shall be made by the electrical fusion method. In exposed or easily accessible locations, mechanical joint polypropylene fittings and joints may be used.
5. Pipe and fittings shall be equal to GSR Fuseal, manufactured by R & G Sloane Co., or equal G. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):
1. General: PVC materials for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Cell Classification 12454-B. Pipe and fitting materials shall be specially formulated with sufficient UV protection additives to provide for long term outdoor exposure with no deleterious effects. Flanges shall be one-piece solid design or two-part van stone type which utilize the tapered, serrated face and full face gasket technique for joining and are compatible with ANSIN16.5 Class 150 metal flanges. Unions shall be the O-ring type having interchangeable components with true union valves for maximum system versatility.
2. Schedule 40, 80, and 120: Pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785. Schedule 80 PVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467. Schedule 40 PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466. PVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirement of ASTM D2564/ Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464.
H. Compressed Air / Pneumatic Hose (Air & Multipurpose)
1. General: Pneumatic hose shall consist of general purpose rubber hose (per Parker GST II, or equal) designed for air compressor and shop air hose systems, transfer of mild/diluted chemicals, and water in applications to 212 degrees F and 300 psi. 454
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Pneumatic hose shall be installed and routed within casing pipe sleeves (PVC) for ease in installation and retrieval. Use of existing PVC casing pipe sleeves shall be permitted.
Pneumatic hose shall transition to 304 stainless steel tubing at all locations for connection to existing and new equipment.
3. Industry Standards: ARPM Class C Tube
4. Tube: Black EPDM; ARPM Class C oil resistance
5. Material: Hose reinforcement four textile plies and black EPDM cover, smooth finish.
6. Min/Max Working Temp (F): -40 to 212
7. Min Bending Radius: 10 inches
8. Max Working Pressure: 200 psi
9. Fittings: Compatible fittings shall be supplied per hose manufacturer recommendations.
Fittings shall be supplied as needed for connection to all new and existing pneumatic devices.
Isolation points shall be provided in each PVC casing sleeve junction / pull box.
10. Reels: Retractable (spring powered auto rewind with stop) hose reels shall be supplied where indicated in the drawings. Hose reels shall include a minimum of 50-feet of 3/8 inch hose rated for up to 250 psi working pressure, complete with quick connect fittings, and wall, floor, or ceiling mount configurations.
11. Installation of Compressed Air Piping: Run compressed air piping with pitch as shown, without pockets. Provide drip leg/tee and drain valve at low points. All branches shall be taken off tip of mains.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS (FD)
A. Cast iron body with Nikaloy top, Jonespec Series 21220, Jay R. Smith Fig. 2110, or equal. In process areas above tanks or exposed to sewer gas, the floor drains shall be provided with quad close trap seal.
B. Provide trap primers as indicated in the plans.
2.3 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Pre-Fabricated Trench Drain Channels:
1. Trench drain channels shall be made of pre-cast polymer concrete with a top width of 6.1 inches, radiused bottoms and nominal lengths of ½ of 1 meter. All channels shall interlock with tongue and groove connections with adjoining channels. Each channel shall have horizontal anchoring ribs to mechanically lock the channel into the floor slab or pavement.
2. Channels shall have available vertical cut outs for 4-inch or 6-inch discharge and available 4-inch or 6-inch horizontal outlet end caps. Channels shall have a built-in bottom slope of
0.6 percent.
B. Channel Grates: Channel grates shall be for heavy duty service made of Vinylester FRP or approved equal. Grates should be securely locked down with built-in channel lock blocks. Locking mechanism shall be designed so as to provide an obstruction-free trench for maintenance and cleaning as well as to prevent concrete from entering channels during installation.
C. Catch Basins: Catch basins shall be pre-cast concrete with grates as noted in plans. Any trench drains entering catch basins shall interlock fully with tongue and groove connections.
D. Joint Sealers: To prevent leakage, joints between channels, catch basin connections, etc., shall be sealed with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Manufacturers: Trench drains shall be as manufactured by ACO Polymer Products, Inc., or equal.
2.4 FLASHING
A. Where pipe of this Section pass through the roof, flash with Semco No. 1100-4 seamless 4 lbs. flashing, with steel reinforced “Vari-Pitch” boot and cast iron counterflashing sleeve or as approved equal.
455
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.5 PIPE HANGERS
A. Water Piping:
1. Split ring hangers with supporting rods, Grinnel Fig. 108; Elcen Fig. 10, or equal.
2. Semco “trisolators” or approved equal.
3. Channel mounted clamping system, Cush-A-Clamp per ZSI, or equal.
B. Soil and Waste Piping:
1. Variable ring hangers with supporting rods, Grinnel Fig. 108; Elcen 10, or equal.
2. Riser clamps at each floor and as required, Grinnell Fig. 261; Elcen Fig. 39 or equal.
3. Channel mounted clamping system, Cush-A-Clamp per ZSI, or equal.
C. Gas Piping: Split ring hangers with supporting rods, Grinnel Fig. 108; Elcen Fig. 10, or equal.
2.6 PIPE INSULATION
A. Hot and Cold Water (Exposed to Freezing Conditions): Molded fiberglass insulation jacketed with PVC jacketing. Provide .016 mil embossed aluminum weather protective jacket for outdoor application. Insulation 2-inch thick for pipe sizes less than 6-inch. Flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed ratings of 50 or less per ASTM E-84-89a. Manville “Micro-Lok AP”; Owens/Corning Fiberglass “SSL-11,” or equal.
2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior:
1. Concrete walk areas: Jonespec No. 63230-GP; Smith No. 4293 with 4910, or equal.
2. All other areas: Jonespec No. 60010-QS; Smith No. 4293, or equal with pre-cast concrete box as detailed in Drawings.
B. Floors: Jonespec No. 61000; Smith No. 4023, or equal.
C. Finished Walls: Round chrome plated or stainless steel access plate and screw, Jonespec No. 63150; Smith No. 4532, or equal.
2.8 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to the approval of the DESIGN/BUILDER.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are connected.
3.2 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT
A. Lay out the plumbing system in careful coordination with the Drawings, determining proper elevations for all components of the system and using only the minimum number of bends to produce a satisfactorily functioning system.
B. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings (where other work may interfere, consult with the ENGINEER).
C. Lay out pipes to fall within partition, wall, or roof cavities, and to not require furring other than as shown on the Drawings.
3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform trenching and backfilling associated with the work of this Section in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 31 of these Specifications.
456
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Cut bottom of trenches to grade. Make trenches 12-inch wider than the greatest dimension of the pipe.
C. Bedding and Backfilling:
1. Install piping promptly after trenching. Keep trenches open as short a time as practicable.
2. Under the structures, install pipes on a 6-inch bed of damp sand. Backfill the bottom of slab with damp sand.
3. Outside of the structures, install underground piping on a 6-inch bed of damp sand. Backfill to within 12-inch of finish grade with damp sand. Backfill remainder with native soil.
4. Don not backfill until installation has been approved and until Project Record Documents have been properly annotated.
3.4 PIPE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe sizes, schedule, and material to be installed per Drawings.
B. Interior and Exterior Water Piping and Compressed Air Piping:
1. Pipe: Underground, ANSI/ASTM B88, Type K, hard temper, seamless copper water tube.
Aboveground, ANSI/ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, seamless copper water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper or brass solder joint fittings.
3. Solder: Lead-free, tin-antimony solder 95-5, or tin-silver solder 96.5-3.5, 95.5-5 or 94-6.
C. Above Ground Facility Drain Piping:
1. Sizes 3-Inch and Smaller: PVC Schedule 40/80 or standard weight galvanized steel pipe, with black or galvanized cast iron fittings, drainage pattern and screwed joints, or provide service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Sizes 4-Inch and Smaller: PVC Schedule 40/80 or service weight cast iron soil pipe, conforming to ASTM A74, hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings with cast iron mechanical couplings or stainless steel sleeves with stainless steel bands and neoprene gaskets.
D. Above Ground Chemical Waste Piping: Schedule 40 flame retardant polypropylene, GSR Fuseal, or equal, with electrical-resistance fusion joints and fittings, except that mechanical joints may be used in exposed or easily accessible location.
E. Vent Piping:
1. Above Ground: Sizes 2 ½ inches and smaller; Schedule 40 PVC or galvanized steel pipe ASTM A53, welded or seamless, with black or galvanized cast iron drainage fittings. Pipe sizes 3 inches or larger: PVC or Cast iron soil pipe and fittings as specified above.
2. Underground: PVC or Cast iron soil pips and fittings.
F. Underground Facility Drain Piping: Schedule 40/80 PVC or service weight cast iron soil pipe:
Conforming to ASTM A74, bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe and cast iron bell and spigot fittings or hubless cast iron pipe with cast iron mechanical couplings or stainless steel sleeves with stainless steel bands and neoprene gaskets.
G. Underground Chemical Waste Piping: Schedule 40 flame retardant polypropylene pipe with electrical-resistance fusion joints, as specified above.
H. Facility Distribution Gas Piping: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable iron threaded fittings.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General:
1. Proceed as rapidly as the facility construction will permit.
2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until fixtures are installed and final connections have been made.
3. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing of forcing, properly clearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening of the structures will not be permitted.
4. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. 457
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Do not install defective piping of fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged.
6. Shoe no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameled connections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage during construction.
7. Make changes in directions with fittings; make changes in main sizes with eccentric reducing fittings. Unless otherwise noted, install water supply and return piping with straight side of eccentric fittings at top of the pipe.
8. Run horizontal sanitary and storm drainage piping at uniform grade of ¼-inch per foot, unless otherwise noted. Run horizontal water piping with an adequate pitch upwards in direction of flow to allow complete drainage.
9. Provide sufficient swing joint, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices necessary for a flexible pipeline system, whether or not shown on the Drawings.
10. Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar locations, so that weight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment.
11. Pipe the drains from pump glands, drip pans, relief valves, air vents, and similar locations, to spill over an open sight drain, floor drain, or other acceptable discharge point, and terminate with a plain and unthreaded pipe 6 inches above the drain.
12. Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place.
13. Support each item independently from other pipes. Do not use wire for hanging or strapping pipes.
14. Provide complete dielectric isolation between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
15. Provide union and shut off valves suitable located to facilitate maintenance and removal of equipment and apparatus.
B. Trapping and Venting of Fixtures:
1. Trap and vent all plumbing fixtures in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code adopted by the Western Plumbing Officials Association and local plumbing codes, whether or not shown on the Drawings. Strictly adhere to any local codes. Only exceptions to the above will be those fixtures which are especially noted herein or on the Drawings to be provided with special wastes.
2. No vent shall intersect another vent at a point less than 6 inches above extreme overflow level of highest fixture served.
3. Take vents off top half of horizontal runs and grade so as to free vents quickly of any water or condensation.
C. Equipment Access:
1. Install piping, equipment, and accessories to permit access for maintenance. Relocate items as necessary to provide such access, and without additional cost to the Owner.
2. Provide access doors where valves, motors, or equipment requiring access to maintenance are located in walls or chases or above ceilings. Coordinate location of access doors with other trades as required.
3.6 PIPE JOINTS
A. Copper Tubing:
1. Cut square, ream cut end and remove burrs, and clean inside of female fitting to a bright finish.
a. Apply solder flux with brush to tubing.
b. Apply flux to fitting socket.
c. Remove internal parts of solder-end valves prior to soldering. d. Assemble.
e. Remove excess flux.
f. Apply heat and solder. Allow joint to cool.
2. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection of copper tubing to ferrous piping and equipment.
458
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Screwed Piping:
1. Deburr cuts
a. Do not ream exceeding internal diameter of the pipe. b. Thread to requirements of ANSI B2.1.
2. Use Teflon tape on male thread prior to cleaning for air and oil piping.
C. Leaky Joints:
1. Remake with new material.
2. Remove leaky section and/or fitting as directed.
3. Do not use thread cement or sealant to tighten joint.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF POLYPROPYLENE AND PVC PIPING
A. Install in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s directions.
3.8 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Support suspended piping with clevis or trapeze hangers and rods.
B. Space hangers and support for horizontal steel pipes according to the following schedule:
Pipe Size Maximum Spacing on Centers
1 ¼” and smaller 8’–0”
1 ½” to 3” 10’-0”
4” to 5” 14’-0”
C. Space hangers and supports for horizontal copper tubing according to the following schedule:
Tube size Maximum Spacing on Centers
1” and smaller 6’-0”
1 ½” 7’-0”
2” 8’-0”
2 ½” 9’-0”
3” and larger 10’-0”
D. Provide sway bracing on hangers longer than 18-inch.
E. Support vertical piping with riser clamps secured to the piping and resting on the structures.
Provide at each floor unless otherwise noted.
F. Provide insulation continuous through hangers and rollers. Protect insulation by galvanized steel shields.
G. Arrange pipe supports to prevent excessive deflection, and to avoid excessive bending stress.
H. Support piping from inserts or anchors in concrete slabs.
I. Hubless Piping:
1. Provide hangers on the piping at each side of, and within 6 inches of, hubless pipe coupling so the coupling will bear no weight.
2. Do not provide hangers on couplings.
3. Provide hangers adequate to maintain alignment and to prevent sagging of the pipe.
4. Make adequate provision to prevent shearing and twisting of the pipe and the joint.
3.9 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. Provide sleeves in place before concrete is placed.
1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is placed.
2. For un-insulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through, or provide a minimum of ½-inch clearance between inside and outside of the pipe. 459
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3. For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of pipe covering, with clearance for packing and caulking.
B. Caulk the space between the sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, using a noncombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining compound which leaves a smooth finished appearance, or pack with noncombustible fiberglass packing or fiberglass rope to within ½-incn of both wall faces, and provide the waterproof compound described above.
C. Finish and Escutcheons:
1. Smooth rough edges around sleeves with plaster or spackling compound.
2. Provide 1-inch wide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons on all pipes exposed to view where passing through walls, floors, partitions, ceiling, and similar locations. a. Size the escutcheons to fit pipe and covering.
b. Hold escutcheons in place with set screw.
3.10 CLEANOUTS
A. Secure the DESIGN/BUILDER’s approval of locations for cleanouts in finished areas prior to installation.
B. Provide cleanouts of same nominal size as the pipes they serve – except where cleanouts are required in pipes 4-inch and larger provide 4-inch cleanouts.
C. Make cleanouts accessible. After pressure tests are made an approved, thoroughly graphite the cleanout threads.
3.11 VALVES
A. Provide valves in water, air, and gas systems, Locate and arrange so as to give complete regulation of apparatus, equipment and fixture.
B. Provide valves in at least the following locations:
1. In branches and/or headers of water piping serving a group of fixtures.
2. On both sides of apparatus and equipment.
3. For shutoff of risers and branch mains.
4. For flushing and sterilizing the system.
5. Where shown on Drawings.
C. Locate valves for easy accessibility and maintenance.
3.12 CONCRETE
A. Provide concreted required for the work of this Section in strict accordance with pertinent provisions of Division 03.
3.13 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS
A. Disinfect water systems in accordance with Section 33 0110.58.
1. Perform disinfection under the DESIGN/BUILDER’s observation. Notify the DESIGN/BUILDER at least 48 hours prior to start of the disinfection process.
2. Upon completion of disinfecting, secure and submit the Certificate of Performance required under Article 1.04 of this Section, stating system capacity, disinfectant used, time and rate of disinfectant applied and resultant residuals in ppm at completion.
3. Use disinfectant method approved by the DESIGN/BUILDER.
3.14 OTHER TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Provide personnel and equipment, and arrange for and pay the costs of all required tests and inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdictions.
B. Where tests show materials or workmanship to be deficient, replace or repair as necessary, and repeat the tests until the specified standards are achieved. 460
PLUMBING 22 0000 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Adjust the system to optimum standards of operations.
END OF SECTION 22 0000
461
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 1 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 23 0000 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide ventilating, heating, and air conditioning systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations or publications of the Health and Safety Rules (Air Conditioning Systems), the local Plumbing Code, the local Building Code, and all other local codes. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work in violation of the above codes, rules, and regulations. In the absence of applicable codes, the installation and workmanship shall follow the standards set by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.
B. Section 01 3300 – Submittals
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittals. Furnish complete drawings and technical information for equipment, piping, valves, and controls. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements (including seismic and structural anchoring calculations).
B. Equipment Numbers: Equipment is identified by assigned numbers for reference and location purposes in the Contract Documents. The appropriate equipment numbers shall be included on the Shop Drawings and on other submittals.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Air conditioners, and all fans and blowers, shall carry the manufacturer's standard warranty, and all such warranties shall be furnished upon final acceptance of the completed systems. All reciprocating refrigerant compressors shall carry a 5-year warranty by the manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Quality: All mechanisms or parts shall be amply proportioned for the stresses which may occur during operation or for any other stresses which may occur during fabrication and erection.
Individual parts that are alike in all units shall be alike in workmanship, design, and materials and shall be of the manufacturer's top line, industrial-commercial grade.
B. Supports: All equipment and appurtenances shall be firmly anchored or connected to supporting members. All supports required for the proper installation of the equipment, but not forming an integral part of the building structure, shall be provided by the heating and ventilating subcontractor, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be supported on restrained spring-type vibration isolators.
C. Noise/Vibration Control: The system shall be free of any objectionable vibrations and noise.
Flexible connections shall be provided in all ducts and piping connections to fans, compressors, and any other vibrating equipment.
462
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 2 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic and wind forces shall be the greater of the two as noted and as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports shall bear the signature and seal of a Professional Engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Equipment Foundations: Mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch high concrete or prefabricated bases, where indicated. Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment shall be verified through the equipment manufacturer.
2.3 DUCTWORK AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Construction: Sheet metal ducts and plenums shall be constructed with airtight joints and seams in accordance with ASHRAE standards and SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. All joints on concealed ducts shall be taped with pressureless tape and adhesive, except welded or soldered joints. Ductwork materials shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
Minimum duct gauges required are as follows:
Maximum Dimension
of Duct (inches)
Galvanized Steel
U.S. Standard Gauge
Aluminum
B and S Gauge
12 and less 26 24
13 through 30 24 22
31 through 54 22 20
55 through 84 20 18
B. Supports: Supports for horizontal ducts and plenums shall be galvanized steel angles with hanger rods. Supports for vertical ducts shall be band iron strap or angle bracket type. Inlet ducts shall be amply braced to withstand maximum negative pressure.
C. Insulation: The exterior of all ductwork inside of buildings downstream of air conditioning or heating units, other than ducts located in air-conditioned spaces, shall be insulated with 2-inch thick flexible glass fiber insulation with a UL-labeled vapor barrier. All joints shall be taped to provide a continuous vapor seal. The insulation shall be attached to the ducts with adhesive applied in a 50 percent coverage. Insulation also shall be secured to the bottom of rectangular ducts over 24 inches wide with mechanical fasteners spaced 12 inches on centers. Ductwork to be internally lined will not require exterior insulation.
D. Lining: The interior of supply and return ducts and plenums within 10-feet distance from fans and all ductwork exposed to the weather shall be lined. Duct lining shall be 1-inch thick fiber glass fastened to the inside of the ducts. Fastening shall be 100 percent coverage adhesive and mechanical fasteners 12 inches on center in both directions starting approximately 6 inches from ends of insulation. All exposed edges, ends, and rough surfaces shall be painted with adhesive or taped with 3-inch canvas tape dipped in adhesive.
E. Bird Screens: Removable bird screens shall be provided on all outside air intakes and exhaust air discharges to outside air. Screens shall be secured in frames of same metal as screens. Bird screens shall be ½-inch mesh stainless steel by 14-gauge.
F. Flexible Connectors: Flexible duct connections shall be made with banded or flanged 8-oz canvas, or reinforced plastic, or equal at each point where a blower unit is connected to a duct. A minimum clearance of 3 inches between the duct and source of vibration shall be maintained.
G. Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers: All supply air registers and diffusers, return air, and exhaust grilles shall be constructed with smooth corners, flanges, and sponge rubber gaskets and material 463
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 3 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
as noted on the Diffuser Schedule in the Contract Documents. All supply and return air registers and diffusers shall have individually variable blades and volume control dampers as indicated. All ceiling or duct-mounted outlets shall be off-white. Wall-mounted outlets shall be factory primecoated. Terminals shall be Titus; Metalaire; Krueger; or equal.
H. Acoustic Louvers: Acoustic louvers shall be provided as indicated. Acoustic louvers shall have a minimum noise reduction of 14 dB at octave band No. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit certified data from a laboratory substantiating the acoustical performance. Static pressure drop shall not exceed 0.100 inches W.C. at 750 fpm.
I. Acoustic louvers shall be of galvanized formed steel construction with air foil blades. Frame and blade face shall be of 16 and 18-gauge, respectively. Air-side blades shall have perforations, and blades shall be packed with 3.5 lb. density fiber glass or with inert, vermin- and moisture-proof mineral fiber for better acoustical performance. Louvers shall be flush with exterior wall, with mounting frames caulked to provide weather-tight connections. All protruding inside edges shall be provided with smooth moldings. Acoustic louvers shall be Ruskin, Industrial Acoustics Company; or equal. Coat louvers in accordance with Section 09 9700 – Special Coatings.
J. Turning Vanes: Square-turn elbows shall be fitted with shop-fabricated double-blade turning vanes mounted inside rails. Construction shall be of the same material as the duct work and be rigid enough to prevent vibration at high air flow.
K. Air Extractors: An air extractor shall be provided on each take-off from main supply duct adjacent to any diffuser, register, or grille where a splitter is not used. Air extractors shall be Carnes; Tuttle and Bailey; or equal. Extractors shall have synchronized steel curved blades, heavy side rails, and screw operator.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. General: All cooling, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be provided with manual and automatic control systems as indicated. The exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the air conditioner to prevent fan operation while the A/C unit is operating. The exhaust fan shall be controlled from a HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch and line-voltage cooling thermostat, wallmounted. Individual exhaust fans shall have manual switches for single or 2-speed motors as indicated.
B. Thermostats: Room thermostats shall be of the modulating electric type, except where 2-position action is required. Thermostats shall be located in air-conditioned spaces and shall have a range of 40 to 100°F. All thermostats shall have exposed adjustment dials and a thermometer on the front face. Mounting height shall be 5 feet. An insulating back shall be provided where exterior wall mounting is shown. Guards shall be provided for room thermostats installed in areas other than administrative offices or control rooms.
C. Manufacturers: Control system components and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Dayton; Honeywell; Johnson Controls Company; General Controls; or equal.
2.5 PIPING
A. Piping in air conditioning systems shall be galvanized steel. Equipment drains shall be of Type "K" copper tube.
2.6 FANS
A. General: Location, type, capacity, and motor horsepower shall be as indicated. Fans shall be complete with motors, variable motor bases, variable drives, safety cages, belt guards, flexible connections to supply and/or suction ducts, vibration isolators, and necessary accessories. All fans shall be suitable for continuous operation.
B. Performance: Fans shall be guaranteed to deliver the quantities of standard air against the respective static pressure without deviating by more than 5 percent. Every fan wheel, regardless 464
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 4 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
of size, shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and shall be free from objectionable vibration or noises.
2.7 VENTILATION FAN
A. Ventilation fan shall be remote mount, energy conserving type, design flow requirement as noted in the plans. Power consumption shall be no less than 3.5 cfm/watt. Housing shall be insulated to reduce condensation. Duct diameter per plan. Fan shall be UL listed when used with GFCI branch circuit wiring. Brackets shall be provided for joist, truss, or suspension installations.
2.8 CENTRIFUGAL UPBLAST EXHAUST FANS
A. Exhaust fans shall be direct mounted, propeller type. Fan blades shall be fabricated of aluminum, stainless steel or epoxy coated steel as required. Propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced in accordance with ACMA standard 204. Motors shall be continuous duty ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified RPM, voltage, phase, and enclosure. It shall be rated for explosion proof, if required.
Motor drive frame assemblies and fan panels shall be epoxy painted steel, as required. Drive frame assemblies shall be welded wire or formed channels and fan panels shall have pre-punched mounting holes, formed flanges, and a deep formed inlet venturi. Motor shall meet the requirements of Division 26. Fan shall be certified for air and sound performance in accordance with ACMA.
B. Performance: Fans shall be guaranteed to deliver the quantities of standard air against the respective static pressure without deviating by more than 5 percent. Every fan wheel, regardless of size, shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and shall be free from objectionable vibration or noises. Fan performances indicated in the schedule shall be minimum.
C. Fan manufacturers shall be Greenheck, or equal.
2.9 FILTERS
A. All air handling units and air conditioners shall be provided with filter compartments. The filters shall be of the disposable, high efficiency, industrial type, set into galvanized mounting frames with fastening clips for easy removal. Filters shall provide a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) Rating of 8, and have a clear label indicating MERV rating.
2.10 EVAPORATIVE COOLER
A. Produces evaporative induced cooled air for duct mounting. Evaporative cooler shall provide the required CFM and operating conditions as indicated in the plans and drawings. Material of construction shall be made of noncorrosive material capable of resisting corrosion and wear caused by moisture. Units shall operate on 480 VAC, unless noted. Furnished with fan, motor, enclosure with evaporative pads, controls, mounting hardware, 480 VAC to 24 VAC transformer with connection for hard wiring. Excess water is removed from the bottom of the unit via a drain hose.
2.11 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A. Air Handling Indoor Unit: Indoor mounted, draw-thru, packaged air-handling unit that can be used in a suspended horizontal configuration or a vertical configuration. Unit shall consist of forwardcurved belt-driven centrifugal fan(s), motor and drive assembly, pre-wired fan motor contactor, factory-installed refrigerant metering devices (direct-expansion coil units), cooling coil, 2-in. (51-mm) disposable air filters, and condensate drain pans for vertical or horizontal configurations.
1. Base Unit:
a. Cabinet shall be constructed of mill-galvanized steel. b. Cabinet panels shall be fully insulated with 1
/2-in. (12.7-mm) fire-retardant material.
Insulation shall contain an EPA-registered immobilized antimicrobial agent to effectively resist the growth of bacteria and fungi as proven by tests in accordance with ASTM standards G21 and 22 (USA).
465
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 5 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
c. Unit shall contain non-corroding condensate drain pans for both vertical and horizontal applications. Drain pans shall have connections on right and left sides of unit to facilitate field connection. Drain pans shall have the ability to be sloped toward the right or left side of the unit to prevent standing water from accumulating in pans. d. Unit shall have factory-supplied 2-in. (51-mm) throwaway-type filters installed upstream from the cooling coil. Filter access shall be from either the right or left side of the unit.
2. Coils:
a. DX coil is 4-row and consists of copper tubes with sine-wave aluminum fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. Suction and liquid line connections or supply and discharge connections shall be made on the same side of the coil. b. Direct-expansion coils shall feature factory installed thermostatic expansion valves (TXVs) for refrigerant control. The TXVs shall be Puronr R-410A-compatible and capable of external adjustment. Direct-expansion heat pump coils shall have a factory-installed bypass line and check valve assembly around the TXVs to allow liquid flow from the coil to the outdoor unit during the heating mode. Coil tubing shall be internally rifled to maximize heat transfer.
c. Chlorofluorocarbons and Halons are prohibited.
d. Chilled water coils shall be rated for an operating pressure of not less than 300 psig (2069 kPag).
3. Operating Characteristics:
a. Unit shall meet the design requirements as shown on the plans.
4. Motor:
a. Fan motor of the size and electrical characteristics specified on the equipment schedule shall be factory supplied and installed.
b. Motors rated at 1.3 through 3.7 hp (0.97 through 2.76 kW) shall have internal thermal overload protection. Motors rated at 5 hp (3.73 kW) shall be protected by a circuit breaker.
c. Evaporator-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection or manual reset calibrated circuit breakers.
Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate. Motors are designed and qualified in the “air-over” location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum continuous bhp rating that is the maximum application bhp rating for the motor; no “safety factors” above that rating may be applied.
B. Outdoor Condensing Unit: Outdoor-mounted, air-cooled condensing unit suitable for on-theground or rooftop installation. Unit shall consist of a semi-hermetic reciprocating compressor, an air-cooled coil, propeller-type condenser fans, and a control box. Unit shall discharge supply air upward as shown on contract drawings. Unit shall be used in a refrigeration circuit to match a packaged air-handling unit.
1. General: Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled condensing unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, nitrogen holding charge, and special features required prior to field start-up.
2. Unit Cabinet:
a. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a prepainted, baked enamel finish.
b. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a prepainted, baked enamel finish.
c. End unit access panel shall be hinged for compressor and control box service access. d. Lifting holes shall be provided to facilitate rigging.
3. Fans:
a. Condenser fans shall be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air vertically upward. 466
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 6 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
b. Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, 3-phase type with class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings.
c. Shafts shall have inherent corrosion resistance.
d. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced. e. Condenser fan openings shall be equipped with PVC-coated steel wire safety guards.
4. Compressor:
a. Compressor shall be serviceable, reciprocating, semi-hermetic type. b. Compressor shall be equipped with an automatically reversible oil pump, operating oil charge, suction and discharge shutoff valves, and an insert-type, factory-sized crankcase heater to control oil dilution.
c. Compressor shall be mounted on spring vibration isolators with an isolation efficiency of no less than 95%.
d. Compressor speed shall not exceed 1750 rpm (60 Hz units) or 1450 rpm (24.2 r/s) (50 Hz units).
e. Compressor shall unload using suction cutoff unloading (electrical solenoid unloading shall be available as an accessory).
5. Condenser Coil:
a. Condenser coil shall be air cooled, circuited for integral sub-cooler. b. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally grooved, seamless copper tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. Epoxy phenolic fin coating shall be available as an option.
c. Coil shall be protected by a sheet metal casing to eliminate the need for wind baffles for low ambient temperature operation.
d. Coil shall be protected to avoid damage due to the elements and vandalism.
6. Refrigeration Components:
a. Refrigeration circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high-side pressure relief device, liquid line shut-off valve, suction and discharge shutoff valves, nitrogen holding charge, and compressor oil.
7. Controls and Safeties:
a. Minimum control functions shall include:
1) Power and control terminal blocks.
2) Three-minute anti-short-cycling timer to prevent compressor short-cycling. 3) Lockout on auto-reset safety until reset from thermostat. 4) Capacity control on the compressor shall be by suction cutoff unloaders in response to compressor suction pressure. Electric solenoid unloading shall be available as an accessory.
5) A 115-v solenoid shall be provided for solenoid drop control. 6) Head pressure control to 35 F (60 Hz units) or 31 F (-6 C) (50 Hz units) by fan cycling. One condenser fan shall be cycled by discharge pressure to maintain proper head pressure.
7) Winter start control to prevent nuisance trip-outs at low ambient temperatures. b. Minimum safety devices shall include:
1) Automatic reset (after resetting first at control circuit power supply) 2) High discharge-pressure cutout.
3) Low suction-pressure cutout.
4) Condenser fan motors to be protected against overload or single-phase condition by internal overloads.
c. Manual reset at the unit
1) Low oil-pressure cutout.
2) Compressor electrical overload protection through the use of definite-purpose contactors and calibrated, ambient-compensated, magnetic-trip circuit breakers. 467
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0000 - 7 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Circuit breakers shall open all 3 phases in the event of an overload in any one of the phases or a single-phase condition.
8. Operating Characteristics:
a. The combination of the condensing unit and the evaporator or fan coil unit shall have a total net cooling capacity as noted in the plans.
b. The system shall have an EER as noted in the plans or greater at standard ARI conditions.
9. Electrical Requirements:
a. Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be 208/230 v, 3-ph, 60 Hz. b. Unit electrical power shall be single point connection. c. Unit control circuit shall contain a 24-v transformer for unit control, with capacity to operate an indoor fan interlock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Roughing-In: It shall be ascertained that all inserts, chassis, shafts, and openings are correctly located; otherwise all new openings shall be cut at no additional expense.
B. Checking: Test and make tight all work, furnish all equipment necessary to carry out the tests and thoroughly clean the system before startup.
C. System Balancing: After completion of all required work, the system, as a whole, shall be checked and balanced. System balancing shall include the following:
1. Adjusting fans, dampers, diffusers, registers, valves, and other devices so that the quantities of air, water, and steam called for on the Drawings are supplied, returned, or exhausted.
2. Measuring and recording at least once the water and air temperatures delivered through each coil on full heating and full cooling: making all necessary adjustments to obtain the required conditions.
3. Measuring and recording current on each fan and motor, and checking for proper operation of all equipment.
4. Adjusting any variable blade registers to the correct setting to obtain the design conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 0000
468
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 23 0800 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This Section specifies the requirements for test and balance of HVAC and related systems.
B. Related Requirements
1. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures.
2. Section 01 7700: Contract Closeout.
3. Section 23 0000: HVAC
PART 2– PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 DEFINITIONS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. For the purposes of this Section definitions are as indicated in applicable publications of AABC, NEBB, TABB, ASHRAE, ANSI and SMACNA.
1. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
3. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
4. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
5. OAR: OWNER’S Authorized Representative
6. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association.
7. TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
8. TABB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall contract directly with the test and balance agency. Tests performed by testing agencies contracted with the system’s subcontractor will not be accepted. The qualifications of the agency shall comply with Article 3.02, Quality Assurance. The agency shall be responsible for furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required to test, adjust, and balance the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems and related plumbing systems, as described and/or as indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. CONTRACTOR shall obtain services of an independent, qualified testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform testing and balancing Work as specified and as follows:
1. Agency shall be currently certified by either the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB). NEBB or TABB certification shall be for Air and Hydronic Testing, Adjusting and Balancing and Sound and Vibration Measurement.
2. Work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the AABC, NEBB, or TABB National Standards. Where the requirements of the two standards are different, the more stringent requirements shall prevail. Also, if the Contract Documents impose a more stringent standard, then the Contract Documents shall prevail.
C. Performance Criteria: Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with approved Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing agenda.
D. Test Equipment Criteria: Basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by Section Two of the AABC, Section II of the NEBB, or TABB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
469
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Verification: The Test and Balance Agency shall recheck 10 percent (minimum 10) of the measurements listed in the report. The locations shall be selected by PROJECT INSPECTOR or OAR. The recheck will be witnessed by PROJECT INSPECTOR or OAR. If 20 percent of the measurements that are retested differ from the report and are also out of the specified range, an additional 10 percent will be tested. If 20 percent fall outside the specified range, the report will be considered invalid and all test and balance work shall be repeated.
F. Due to more stringent acoustical requirements in the educational environment, the Test and Balance Agency shall recheck the air systems where the sound level is higher than the specified requirements and demonstrate compliance with the methodology specified in this document with emphasis on fan speed adjustment and balancing for optimum acoustical performance. The recheck will be witnessed by PROJECT INSPECTOR or OAR. When there are multiple air systems, a system selected by PROJECT INSPECTOR or OAR shall be rechecked. If this system is found to be not in compliance, a second system shall be checked. If the second system if also found to be not in compliance, the report will be considered invalid, and all test and balance work shall be repeated.
3.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of agency to perform the Work. Include in the submittal the certified qualifications of all persons responsible for supervising and performing actual Work of this Section. Agency shall submit a minimum of five commercial or industrial HVAC system TAB projects of similar type, size, and degree of difficulty completed within the last two years. Agency shall provide name and telephone number of contact person for each listed project.
B. Submit, for approval, 6 copies of the Agenda as indicated in Article 3.06 to test and balance all mechanical and relevant plumbing systems.
C. Preliminary Report: Review the Contract Documents, examine Work installations and submit a written report to the ENGINEER indicating deficiencies in Work precluding proper testing and balancing of the Work.
D. Final TAB Report: Submit the final TAB report for review by ENGINEER outlining the conditions and Work completed on each HVAC system. All outlets, devices, HVAC equipment, etc. shall be identified, along with a numbering system corresponding to report unit identification.
E. Submit an AABC “National Project Performance Guaranty” or “NEBB Quality Assurance Certification”, assuring the Project systems were tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the Specifications and AABC, NEBB, or TABB National Standards.
F. CAD drawings: Submit single line, multi-color CAD drawings indicating outside return and supply air, volume control boxes, each outlet and inlet, room numbers, duct sizes at traverse locations, temperatures and pressures, systems balanced, components changed, and CONTRACTOR installed access points. In addition, drawings shall identify controls, equipment settings, including manual damper quadrant positions, manual valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls, and devices shall be marked on the drawings to show final settings. CAD files shall be submitted on CD-ROM upon final submittal of TAB report. Reports shall identify discrepancies between completed Work and the Contract Documents affecting the performance and longevity of the system.
3.4 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
A. The general scope of Work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Measure airflow rates of HVAC systems and adjust to achieve design airflow rates, tabulate results, and submit reports.
2. Measure flow velocities, temperatures, static pressures or head, rotational speed, and electrical power demand of fans, pumps, and other related HVAC system components, tabulate results, and submit reports.
3. Measure sound levels in each conditioned space, tabulate results, and submit reports. 470
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
4. Measure ambient sound levels of outdoor HVAC units and system components such as chillers and cooling towers, tabulate results, and submit reports.
5. Reports shall contain sufficient data for the system designer to evaluate system performance and solve installation problems such as system pressure profiles and pressure drops across system components.
3.5 SPECIFIC SCOPE OF WORK
A. The specific scope of Work shall include the following HVAC system components as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Air Handling Units
2. Air Conditioning Units
3. Heating and Ventilating Units
4. Heating and Cooling Coils
5. Supply, Return, Relief and Exhaust Fans
6. Outside Air and Return Air Plenums
7. Outside Air Intakes
8. All Supply and Return Ductwork
9. All associated Air Terminal Devices, i.e., Supply Diffusers, Return Registers, etc.
10. Exhaust Duct Systems
11. Kitchen Hoods
12. Laboratory Hoods
3.6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING AGENDA
A. Provide proposed materials, methods, procedures, forms, diagrams, and reports for test and balance Work.
B. Agenda to be completed by the test and balance agency and submitted to ENGINEER review and approval.
C. Agenda shall include one complete set of AABC, NEBB, or TABB publications listed in Subparagraph 3.2.B.2, applicable publications, or, in case of other test and balance agencies and or organizations, comparable publications to establish an approved, systematic, and uniform set of procedures.
D. Agenda shall also include the following detailed narrative procedures, system diagrams, and forms for test results:
1. Specific standard procedures required and proposed for each system of the Work.
2. Specified test forms for recording each procedure and for recording sound and vibration measurements.
3. Systems diagrams for each air, water, and steam system. Diagrams may be single line.
E. In addition to information recorded for standard AABC, NEBB, or TABB procedures, the following information is required:
1. Fan data
2. System number, location, manufacturer, model, and serial number
3. Fan wheel type and size
4. Motor horse power, type, and rpm
5. Sheave size, type, number of grooves, and open turns on Variable Pitch Sheave
6. Number and size of belts, motor and fan shaft sizes, center-to-center of shafts in inches, and adjustment available motor data, including nameplate data, actual amps, rated, and actual motor rpm, volts, phase, hp, kW, starter heater size, and capacity.
7. Fan design airflow and service (supply, return, outdoor air, or exhaust)
8. Fan static pressure, suction/discharge, static profile, and static control point 471
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. The following traverse data is required:
1. Traverse location, size of duct (inside dimensions), and area of duct in square feet
2. Column for each hole traversed/lines for each reading
3. Barometric pressure
4. Temperature/Static pressure in the duct
5. Actual CFM corrected to SCFM
6. Notes
G. The following air distribution data is required:
1. Room identification
2. Outlet or intake balance sequence number
3. Size of outlet or inlet
4. AK Factor
5. Design and Actual FPM and CFM
6. Notes
H. The following air-cooled split system condensing unit data is required:
1. Performance test results for rated capacity
2. Unit identification number
3. Nameplate data, manufacturer, model, and serial number
4. Compressor nameplate and actual amps, volts, phase, and hertz
5. RPM of motors, where applicable
6. Refrigerant type
7. Suction/Discharge pressure when gage installe.
8. Number of stages
9. Low-pressure/High-pressure control setting
10. Condenser fan sequence stages
11. Crankcase heater watts (nameplate)
12. Hot gas bypass installed - yes/no
13. SCFM Air Flow Measurement vs. Design CFM
I. The following air-cooled split system heat pump data is required:
1. Performance test results for rated heating and cooling capacities
2. Unit identification number
3. Nameplate data, manufacturer, model, and serial number
4. Compressor nameplate and actual amps, volts, phase, and hertz
5. RPM of motors, where applicable
6. Refrigerant type
7. Suction/Discharge pressure for both heating and cooling modes when gage installed.
8. Number of stages
9. Low-pressure/High-pressure control setting
10. Condenser fan sequence stages
11. Crankcase heater watts (nameplate)
12. Hot gas bypass installed - yes/no
13. SCFM Air Flow Measurement vs. Design CFM
J. The following sound test data is required:
1. Area or location
2. Sound level in dB(A) as specified in Article 3.19
3. Sound level at the center band frequencies of eight non-weighted octaves with equipment on and off for 5 rooms selected by the OAR/PROJECT INSPECTOR
4. Plot of corrected sound-level reading on Noise Criteria (NC) curve for the measurements in Q 3 above.
472
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
K. The following vibration test data is required:
1. Equipment identification number
2. Vibration levels at all accessible bearings, motors, fans, pumps, casings, and isolators.
3. Measurements in mils defection and velocity in inches per second
4. Each measurement taken in horizontal, vertical, and axial planes as accessible L. The following mixing damper leakage test data is required:
1. Equipment identification number (unit, box, zone, etc.)
2. Dry bulb temperature in the cold/hot (or bypass) deck
3. Dry bulb temperature in the mixed air stream
4. Calculated percent leakage
5. Data above taken in the full cool and full heat (or bypass) mode
6. Notes
M. The following airflow station data is required:
1. Station identification number
2. Nameplate data including effective area
3. Differential test pressure or velocity
4. Calculated CFM
5. Actual CFM (from Pitot-tube traverse form)
6. Read out CFM
7. Notes
N. The following unit heater data is required:
1. Equipment identification number
2. Nameplate data; manufacturer, model, and serial number
3. Test CFM (use manufacturer rated CFM if not ducted)
4. Heat test data per applicable procedure (hot water, electric, etc.)
5. Notes
O. The following fan coil and unit ventilator data is required:
1. Equipment identification number
2. Nameplate data; manufacturer, model, and serial number
3. Tested supply CFM or manufacturer rated CFM if not ducted
4. Tested outside air in CFM
5. Motor data and actual amps and volts
6. Cooling/Heating test data.
7. Static pressure
8. Notes
P. The following kitchen hood data is required:
1. Hood identification number
2. Nameplate data; manufacturer, model, and serial number
3. Pitot-tube traverse total air flow
4. Exhaust and supply (when part of hood) CFM
5. Exhaust and supply (when part of hood) test velocities shown on hood face diagram
6. Face velocities
7. Hood opening dimensions
8. Notes (turbulence and flow patterns at the face and inside the hood) Q. The following laboratory hood data is required:
1. Hood identification number
2. Nameplate data; manufacturer, model, and serial number
3. Pitot-tube traverse total air flow
4. Exhaust and supply (when part of hood) CFM
473
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Exhaust and supply (when part of hood) test velocities shown on hood face diagram
6. Face velocities
7. Hood opening dimensions
8. Notes (turbulence and flow patterns at the face and inside the hood)
3.7 PROCEDURES
A. Schedule the Work of this Section in order for test and balance activities to be completed prior to the date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR shall place all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment into operation during each day and until all HVAC adjusting, balancing, testing, demonstrations, and instructions on systems are completed. Agency shall prepare and submit reports within ten (10) days from completion of the Work of this Section to allow sufficient time for corrective measures to be completed before Substantial Completion of the Work. When an individual building or portion thereof is ready for occupancy, all equipment relative to such portion of Work shall be put into service, tested, and balanced.
B. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, and upon completion of test and balance Work, place all exhaust fans in operation, force all air handling units, and air conditioning units into a 100 percent outdoor air economizer mode with heating and cooling locked out and flush the building continuously for a period of fourteen (14) days.
C. Coordinate test and balance procedures with any phased Project requirements so test and balance procedures on each phased portion of the Work will be completed prior to completion of said designated phase.
3.8 FIELD EXAMINATION
A. Before the commencement of test and balance Work, CONTRACTOR shall ascertain that following conditions are fulfilled:
1. Refrigerant systems are fully charged with specified refrigerant.
2. Over-voltage and current protection have been provided for motors.
3. Equipment has been labeled as required.
4. Curves and descriptive data on each piece of equipment to be tested and adjusted are available as required.
5. Operations and maintenance manuals have been supplied.
6. Controls manufacturer and boiler-burner representatives shall be available for consultation and supervision of adjustments during tests.
7. Verify that heating and cooling coil fins are cleaned, combed and air filters clean, and installed.
8. Verify that duct systems are clean of debris and leakage is minimized, access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place, and fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
9. Automatic control systems are completed and operating.
10. Start up and initial commissioning of all HVAC equipment except fans shall be by the manufacturer.
B. In addition to the above, CONTRACTOR shall establish a specific, coordinated plan which details how each area of existing building will be balanced during the various phases of the Work. The evaluation shall address, at a minimum, the following concerns:
1. OWNER operations.
2. Building safety and security policies. Prior to any fire safety or security systems shutdown at any time during the Work, DESIGN/BUILDER shall first advise and coordinate with OWNER to ensure all concerned parties are notified.
3. Protecting furniture, computers, photocopiers, and other office equipment.
4. Protecting other building fixtures and equipment.
5. Concerns specific and unique to building related issues.
6. Downtime required for each Air Handling Unit including projected time to return each portion of the building back to its normal occupancy temperature and humidity. 474
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
7. Shutdown and reactivation of the fire alarm system to avoid accidental alarms during test and balance and related Work.
3.9 TEST AND BALANCE
A. For each heating, ventilating, or air conditioning system the following shall be performed, recorded, and submitted in an approved format for review. Make, type, and model of unit, and location of each piece of equipment shall be included in the report. Readings shall include but not be limited to following:
1. Air Systems:
a. General
1) Verify all ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusers have been installed per design and set in the fully open position. Agency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with AABC or NEBB National Standards.
Where the requirements of the two standards are different, the more stringent requirements shall prevail. Also, if the Contract Documents impose a more stringent standard then the Contract Documents shall prevail. b. Zone, Branch, and Main Ducts:
1) Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements by means of Pitot-tube duct traverse.
c. Supply Fans:
1) Fan Speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve maximum or design CFM.
CONTRACTOR shall provide new belt pulleys when required. 2) Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits. Ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor as published by the motor manufacturer.
3) Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, record total CFM.
4) Outside Air: Test and adjust the outside air using Pitot-tube traverse. 5) Static Pressure: Test and record system static profile of each supply fan. 6) Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits. Ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor as published by the motor manufacturer.
d. Return, Relief, and Exhaust Fans:
1) Fan Speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve maximum or design CFM.
CONTRACTOR shall provide new belt pulleys where required. 2) Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of the main return ducts to obtain total CFM.
2. Static Pressure: Test and record system static profile of each fan. e. VAV Systems:
1) Set volume regulators on all terminal boxes to meet design maximum and minimum CFM requirements.
2) Identification: Identify the type, location, and size of each terminal box. This information shall be recorded on terminal box data sheets. f. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
1) Tolerances: Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5 percent of design requirements.
2) Identification: Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser, and register. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets. g. Coils: Air Temperature: Once airflow is set to acceptable limits, agency shall take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil.
475
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
h. Duct Leakage Testing:
1) On existing ductwork, agency shall calculate duct leakage by traversing the unit and reading associated diffusers.
2) On new installations each and every section of the entire air distribution system (all supply, return, exhaust, and relief ductwork) shall be tested at 1.5 times design static pressure. All ducts shall demonstrate 5 percent leakage maximum (per CBC).
i. Air Handling Units:
1) Prepare pressure profile and show design and actual CFM (outside air, return air, and supply air).
2) Measure and record each mode (minimum OA and 100 percent OA) where economizer cycle is specified.
3) Record pressure drops of all components (coils, filters, sound attenuators, louvers, dampers, and fans) and compare with design values. 4) Pressure profile and component pressure drops are performance indicators and are not to be used for flow measurements.
j. System Pressure Profiles:
1) Prepare pressure profiles from fan (supply, return, and exhaust) or air handling unit to extremities of system.
2) As a minimum, show pressure at each floor, main branch, and airflow measuring device.
3) Make pitot-tube traverses of all trunk lines and major branch lines where required for analysis of distribution system. Airflow measuring devices installed in ductwork, if available, may be utilized.
4) Record residual pressures at inlets of volume controlled terminals at ends of system.
5) Show actual pressures at all static pressure control points utilized for constant or variable flow systems.
k. Fan speed adjustments and balancing for optimum acoustical performance:
1) As the very first step, the speed of all fans (supply, return, and exhaust inside packaged equipment or air handling units) shall be adjusted to deliver the required fan total air quantity with all volume dampers and other flow rate control devices fully open. Adjustments shall be made with the outdoor air intake dampers, return air dampers, and relief air dampers in the minimum outdoor air position. The adjustments shall be made again in the 100 percent outdoor air position in systems with 100 percent outdoor air economizers. 2) The above adjustment shall be done with wet cooling coils, where cooling coils are provided.
3) The airflow rates at each branch duct shall be adjusted as the second step with air with all volume dampers and other flow rate control devices fully open. 4) The airflow rates at each air inlet and outlet shall be adjusted as the final step.
The volume damper in the branch duct shall be used for balancing. Opposed blade dampers at air inlets and outlets where provided shall only be used for fine adjustments and shall not be closed beyond 60 percent open or when the dampers start to generate audible noise.
5) CONTRACTOR shall provide the labor and materials for all dampers, pulleys, and belt changes required for balancing. The design documents indicate the worst-case scenario with safety factors in fan static pressures for contingency.
Properly coordinated and installed air systems may require a lower static pressure and a reduction in fan speed.
476
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Outside Climatic Conditions: Outside air DB temperature, WB temperature, and atmospheric conditions, during temperature profile runs.
1. Air Conditioning Units: (Start-up and initial commissioning by manufacturer only.) a. Suction pressure and temperature
b. Discharge pressure and temperature
c. Amps and volts
d. Make, type, and model of unit, capacity rating
e. Ambient temperature: WB, DB
f. Supply, return, relief, and exhaust fans shall be balanced as indicated in Section
3.9.A.1, Air Systems
g. Proper operation of controls: Temperature controllers and safety devices shall be tested during operating tests, with all other controls and devices, except one under test, being by-passed.
h. Upon completion of tests, controls and devices shall be returned to their normal operating condition and boiler shall remain in service.
2. Condensing and Refrigerating Units: (Start-up and initial commissioning by manufacturer only.)
a. Suction pressure and temperature.
b. Discharge pressure and temperature.
c. Amps and volts.
d. Make, type, and model of unit, capacity rating.
e. Ambient temperature: WB, DB.
f. Proper operation of controls: Temperature controllers and safety devices shall be tested during operating tests, with all other controls and devices, except one under test, being by-passed.
g. Upon completion of tests, controls and devices shall be returned to their normal operating condition and boiler shall remain in service.
3. Split System Heat Pump Units: (Start-up and initial commissioning by manufacturer only.) a. Suction pressure and temperature.
b. Discharge pressure and temperature.
c. Amps and volts.
d. Make, type, and model of unit, capacity rating.
e. Ambient temperature: WB, DB.
f. Supply, return, relief, and exhaust fans shall be balanced as indicated in Subparagraph 3.9.A.1, Air Systems. g. Proper operation of controls: Temperature controllers and safety devices shall be tested during operating tests, with all other controls and devices, (except one under test) being by-passed.
h. Upon completion of tests, controls and devices shall be returned to their normal operating condition and boiler shall remain in service.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Electric Heaters:
1. Amperage
2. Voltage
3. Make, type, model, and name plate capacity rating
3.11 Verification of HVAC Controls
A. CONTRACTOR shall verify all control components are installed in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents and are functioning according to the design intent, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire stats, and other safety devices. 477
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 10
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. CONTRACTOR shall verify all control components are calibrated and set for design operating conditions and intent.
3.12 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. To verify system control and operation, agency shall perform a series of three temperature tests taken at approximately two-hour intervals in each separately controlled zone. The resulting temperatures shall not vary more than two degrees Fahrenheit from the thermostat or control set point during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testing periods.
3.13 KITCHEN HOOD TESTING
A. Agency shall test and adjust hood total airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must be made in writing to Architect and subsequently appear on the appropriate data sheet. Face velocities shall be tested under design operating conditions using a maximum of a one square foot grid pattern across the entire open face.
CONTRACTOR shall set sash height on hoods to obtain face velocities within 20 percent of 100 feet per minute unless specified otherwise. Agency shall test and adjust exhaust airflows and makeup air flows to maintain design hood pressures and face velocities and design room pressurization.
Agency shall test for turbulence and proper air flow patterns at the face and inside the hoods using a hand-held smoke puffer or other approved smoke-emitting device.
3.14 FUME HOOD TESTING
A. Agency shall test and adjust fume hood total airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must be made in writing to Architect and subsequently appear on the appropriate data sheet. Face velocities shall be tested under design operating conditions using a maximum of a one square foot grid pattern across the entire open face. CONTRACTOR shall set sash height on hoods to obtain face velocities within 20 percent of 100 feet per minute unless specified otherwise. Agency shall test and adjust VAV controllers to obtain design exhaust airflows and make-up air flows to maintain design hood pressures and face velocities and design room pressurization. Agency shall test for turbulence and proper air flow patterns at the face and inside the hoods using a hand-held smoke puffer or other approved smoke-emitting device.
3.15 BUILDING/ZONE PRESSURIZATION
A. Agency shall test and adjust building/zone pressurization by setting the design flows to meet the required flow direction and pressure differentials. Positive/Negative area(s) supply air shall be set to design flow and exhaust air rates adjusted to obtain the required pressure differential(s).
3.16 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER TESTING
A. This work is to be performed by OWNER and State Fire Marshall. Do not include in agency scope of work.
3.17 LIFE SAFETY CONTROLS TESTING
A. This work is to be performed by OWNER and State Fire Marshall. Do not include in agency scope of Work.
3.18 FINAL TABULATION
A. After heating, ventilating, and air conditioning components are satisfactorily tested and balanced, entire system shall be put into operation and all pressures, temperatures, gpm, cfm, velocities, etc., shall be recorded and checked against design schedules. Design requirements shall be listed on reports and final tabulation shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus five percent of design requirements.
478
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 23 0800 - 11
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.19 VIBRATION TESTING
A. Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements if specified in Division 23. Provide measurements for all rotating HVAC equipment half horsepower and larger, including reciprocating/centrifugal/screw/scroll compressors, pumps, fans, and motors.
B. Record initial and final measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms. Where vibration readings exceed allowable tolerance and efforts to make corrections have proved unsuccessful, forward a separate report to ARCHITECT.
3.20 SOUND TESTING
A. Perform and record sound measurements as specified in this Section. Take additional readings if required by ARCHITECT.
B. Measuring equipment and methods shall comply with the current requirements of the AABC, NEBB, TABB, and ANSI S12.60. Take measurements with a calibrated Type 1 sound level meter and octave band analyzer.
C. Sound reference levels, formulae, and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE Handbook:
HVAC Applications, Chapter on Sound and Vibration Control.
D. Where sound levels are required in dbA, measure sound levels using the A-frequency-weighting of meter. Single value readings will be used instead of octave band analysis.
E. Measure sound levels at each octave band as NC or RC (room criteria) if indicated in the Drawings or other Spec Sections. Where measured sound levels exceed specified level, CONTRACTOR shall take all remedial action and necessary sound tests shall be repeated. Sound tests after remedial action shall be in octave band in NC or RC for the room and also at each diffuser, grille, or register in occupied areas. Sound levels shall be measured approximately five feet above floor on a line approximately 45 degrees to center of opening, on the A- and C-frequency-weighting of the measuring instrument.
F. Measure and record sound levels in decibels for each room per current ANSI S12.60.
G. Report shall include ambient sound levels, taken without air-handling equipment operating, of rooms in which above openings are located. A report shall also be made of any noise caused by mechanical vibration.
END OF SECTION 23 0800
479
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. It is the intent of this part of the Contract Documents to cover the work and materials necessary for erecting a complete electrical system, tested and ready for continuous use. The system shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Federal, State, and Local codes and regulations.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work with other trades, and furnish and install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 00 – Procurement & Contracting Requirements
2. Division 01 – General Requirements
3. Division 03 – Concrete
4. Division 09 – Finishes
5. Division 11 – Equipment
6. Division 31 – Earthwork
7. Division 40 – Process Interconnections
1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Minimum sizes of equipment, and electrical devices, are indicated but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural or mechanical difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the work.
B. Work indicated on the Plans is approximately to scale, but actual dimensions and detailed Plans should be followed as closely as field conditions permit. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is governed by field conditions. Installation of systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination.
C. Discrepancies indicated on different Plans, between Plans and actual field conditions, or between Plans and Contract Documents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification, prior to purchasing and installing equipment.
D. The alignment of equipment and conduit shall be adjusted to accommodate architectural changes, or to avoid work of other trades, without extra expense to the OWNER.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the parts and pieces necessary to the installation of equipment, in accordance with the best practice of the trade, and in conformance with the requirements of these Contract Documents.
F. Items not specifically mentioned in these Contract Documents, or noted on the Plans, or indicated on reviewed shop drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be deemed to be included herein.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall lay out and install electrical work prior to placing floors and walls.
Furnish and install sleeves and openings through floors and walls, required for installation of conduits. Sleeves shall be rigidly supported and suitably packed, or sealed, to prevent ingress of wet concrete. Spacers shall be installed in order to prevent conduit movement. Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and their installation are restrictive dimensions.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install inserts and hangers required to support conduits and other electrical equipment. If the inserts, hangers, sleeves, or other mounting hardware are improperly placed, or installed, the CONTRACTOR shall do necessary work, at their own expense, to rectify the errors.
480
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
I. Insulated conductors shall be capable of operating successfully at rated ampacity, without failure, with a minimum temperature rating of 75°C, and specifically rated for the location indicated on the Plans.
J. If any contradictions, contrasts, non-homogeneity, or inconsistency appears, the more strict criteria noted and the collective requirements in any and all of the project documents shall apply.
K. The CONTRACTOR shall perform necessary saw cutting, core drilling, excavating, removal, shoring, backfilling, and other work required for the proper installation of conduits, whether inside, or outside of the buildings and structures. The CONTRACTOR shall repair and patch where demolition has taken place in a manner to match existing original structure.
1.4 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical work, including connection to electrical equipment integral with mechanical equipment, shall be performed in accordance with the latest published regulations, codes, and standards, of the following:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. State and local codes
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards
8. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
10. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) B. When applicable, the material used in the performance of the electrical work shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for the class of service for which they are intended.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. It is the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to organize their work, so that a complete electrical, instrumentation, and control system for the facility will be provided, and will be supported by accurate shop and record drawings, and O&M manuals.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed shop drawings and data prepared and organized by the suppliers. The quantity of submittal sets required shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.
C. The submittals shall be neatly grouped and organized by Specification Section number, and Subsection. Related information shall be highlighted, and the specific product shall be marked. All submittals shall be complete, and presented in one package. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. If a portion of the project requires a fast track schedule, that portion only may be submitted earlier under a separate cover letter. The following shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and returned, reviewed before fabrication is started.
1. A complete list of the equipment and materials, including the manufacturer's name, product specification, descriptive data, technical literature, performance charts, catalog cuts, installation instructions, and spare part recommendations for each different item of the equipment specified. The above shall clearly show all the specified requirements as described in the Specifications including but not limited to specific UL and NEMA rating, technical capabilities, test result verifications, and acceptance letters.
2. Drawings containing complete point to point wiring and schematic diagrams, control diagrams, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will operate as intended. Drawings for each panel, cabinet, or enclosure shall show a complete Bill of Materials, wire numbers for internal panel and field wiring, terminal block numbers, proposed internal layout with assembly details, anchoring, support, and appurtenances of equipment, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operations.
481
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3. Any exceptions to these specifications, with the reasons for requesting such exceptions, with calculations and drawings for redesign of related components, including detail drawings showing internal and assembly details, with installation instructions. Proposed layout showing any modifications or exceptions to related work made necessary by this work, with calculations and drawings showing such modifications or exceptions.
D. Upon Project acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall submit "Record Drawings" of the electrical, control, and instrumentation, along with step-by-step procedure manuals for the installation, operation start-up, and maintenance of the equipment. Each set shall include installation, operating, troubleshooting, and maintenance and overhaul instructions in complete detail. It shall also include possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides, as well as simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system installed. This shall provide the OWNER with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair.
Exploded or other detailed views of all equipment, devices, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included, together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions.
1. Record Drawings:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a marked up set of Contract Document Plans showing actual installed circuit numbers, conduit sizes, cable tray routing, number of conductors, conductor sizes (larger than #12 AWG), and all other deviations from the design Plans.
b. Underground conduit and concealed items shall be dimensioned on the Plans from permanent, visible, building features.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall provide actual motor size, starter size, and overload heater size, along with all other protective equipment for all 480 V and 4160 V motor circuits as part of the one-line record drawings.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall revise all conductor identification and panel schedules to indicate as-built conditions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising any unit, or part thereof, specified or indicated on the Plans, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of highest grade consistent with the state of the art. Damaged materials, equipment, and parts, are not considered to be new and unused, and will not be accepted.
B. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is directed, since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall also review architectural, structural, yard, mechanical, and other Plans, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and shall adjust their work to conform to the conditions indicated therein.
C. The fabricator of major components, such as distribution panelboards, switchgear, and motor control centers, shall also be the manufacturer of the major devices therein.
D. Refer to various Division Sections for individual equipment manufacturers. Indicated manufacturers are subject to strict compliance with the specifications and complete project documents. The reference to a particular manufacturer does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from conforming to the specified requirements.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Where indicated elsewhere in these specifications, or on the Plans, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install nameplates, which shall be black laminate with white letters. The nameplates shall be fastened to the various devices with round head stainless steel screws. Each disconnecting means for service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors, shall have nameplates indicating its purpose.
482
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.3 EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES
A. Equipment assemblies, such as Service Entrance Sections, Switchgear, Switchboards, Control and Distribution Panels, and other custom fabricated electrical enclosures shall bear a UL label as a complete assembly. The UL label on the individual components making up the assembly will not be considered sufficient to meet the present requirement. Whenever a generic UL label does not apply for the assembly, a serialized UL label shall be affixed to the assembly, and the serial number shall be submitted with the assembly record shop drawings.
B. Custom fabricated electrical control panels, and enclosures, shall bear a UL label affixed by a local UL inspector.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 UTILITY SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Utility: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating the electrical utility work with the electrical utility company. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for furnishing and installing equipment and material required to bring electrical power service to the service location in conformance with the electrical utility requirements. The CONTRACTOR may have to provide the following for the electrical utility company's primary (from utility power line to the utility transformer) and secondary (from utility transformer to the service) electrical lines in accordance with the electrical utility company's specifications and requirements:
1. Conduits (verify quantity and sizes).
2. Trenching, backfill, and compacting (verify trench size(s), backfill material, and compaction percentage requirements).
3. Concrete pad(s) (for pad mounted transformer(s)).
4. Cable protection along the vertical drop at the utility company's pole (if pole mounted transformer(s)).
5. Other items required by the power utility company's specifications.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit copies of service entrance shop drawings to the utility, per utility submittal requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written approval from the power utility company that the service entrance equipment is acceptable prior to release the order to the supplier for fabrication. A copy of the approval letter from the utility shall be transmitted to the ENGINEER along with the submittal.
C. Telephone Service: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for contacting the Telephone Company to coordinate requirements to provide telephone service, as called for on the Plans. The CONTRACTOR shall provide trenching, conduit, and backfill for the Telephone Company's communication lines from the Telephone Company's main distribution panel to the telephone company's connection box at this project site, as required by the Telephone Company. Similarly the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate any fiber optic utility connections and provide hardware/equipment including trenches, conduit and enclosures per utility requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades.
1. Arrange for the building in of equipment during structure construction.
2. Where equipment cannot be built-in during construction, arrange for sleeves, box-outs, and other openings, as required to allow installation of equipment after structure construction is complete.
B. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.
C. Equipment Dimensions and Clearances:
1. Do not use equipment that exceeds the indicated dimensions, except as approved in writing by the ENGINEER.
2. Do not use equipment or arrangements of equipment that reduce required clearances or 483
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
exceed the space allocation.
D. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
E. Equipment Access:
1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.
2. Equipment shall not be blocked or concealed.
3. Do not install electrical equipment such that it interferes with normal maintenance requirements of other equipment.
F. Equipment shall be installed plumb, square and true with the building construction, and shall be securely fastened.
G. Outdoor wall-mounted equipment, and indoor equipment mounted on earth, or water bearing walls, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant spacers to maintain ¼-inch separation between the equipment and the wall.
H. Screen or seal all openings into outdoor equipment to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects.
I. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be imbedded in earth or concrete.
J. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports:
1. Use supports as detailed on the Plans and as specified.
2. Supports and anchoring devices shall be rated and sized based on dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals.
3. Hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
4. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members.
5. Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment.
K. CONTRACTOR shall verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrical items furnished by others.
1. Shop drawings shall be obtained from those furnishing the equipment.
2. Proceeding without proper information may require the CONTRACTOR to remove and replace work that does not meet the conditions imposed by the equipment supplied.
3. Provide sleeves wherever openings are required through new concrete or masonry members.
Place sleeves accurately and coordinate locations with the ENGINEER.
4. Should any cutting and patching be required on account of failure of the CONTRACTOR to coordinate penetrations, such cutting and patching shall be done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger the stability of any structural member by cutting, digging, chasing, or drilling and shall not, at any time, cut or alter the work without the ENGINEER’s written consent.
1) Provide additional reinforcing if required.
2) Cutting shall be done neatly using proper tools and methods. b. Subsequent patching to restore walls, ceilings, or floors to their original condition shall be done by the CONTRACTOR.
L. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment as indicated or specified.
1. Floor-mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 3-inch concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab.
484
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.3 TEMPORARY POWER
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain, temporary power and lighting systems needed for construction. This temporary system shall include weatherproof panel(s) for the CONTRACTOR's main breakers and distribution system. Ground fault interrupting equipment shall be installed. Connections shall be watertight, with wiring done with Type SO portable cable.
After construction is completed, the CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary power equipment and devices.
3.4 CUTTING AND REPAIRING
A. Where it becomes necessary to cut into existing work for the purpose of making electrical installations, core drills shall be used for making circular holes. Other demolition methods for cutting or removing shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER prior to starting the work.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall repair damage caused by construction, or demolition work, and restore damaged areas to original condition.
3.5 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come in contact, the CONTRACTOR shall isolate these metals, as required, with neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. Where fastening conduit, electro plated or equivalent fasteners and stainless steel bolts shall be used.
B. Factory finishes damaged during shipping, or construction, shall be restored to original new condition. Rust shall be removed, and bare metal surfaces shall be primed and painted to match the original surrounding finish.
C. Electrical panels, switchgear, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment, shall be shipped in sealed dust and moisture proof plastic sheet enclosures, and the seal maintained until units are installed. Said units shall be new and free of any dirt, dust, water, grease, rust, damaged parts, or components. Relays, starters, circuit breakers, switches, contacts, insulators, mechanisms, and buses shall be free of dust, dirt, oil, moisture, metal shavings, and other debris before testing and energizing.
D. Once equipment is installed, it shall be protected at all times with plastic sheet covers until the area is free of dirt, dust, paint spray, water, and other trades. Heat shall be provided to eliminate condensation.
3.6 COORDINATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. The CONTRACTOR shall verify actual equipment, and motor full-load, and locked-rotor current ratings. The necessary minimum equipment, wire, and conduit sizes are indicated on the Plans. If the CONTRACTOR furnishes equipment of different ratings, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the actual current rating of equipment furnished with the branch circuit conductor size, the overcurrent protection, the controller size, the motor starter, and the branch circuit overcurrent protection. The branch circuit conductors shall have a current carrying capacity of not less than 125 percent of the actual full-load current rating. The size of the branch circuit conductors shall be such that the voltage drop from the overcurrent protection devices, up to the equipment, shall not exceed 2 percent, when the equipment is running at full-load and rated voltage.
3.7 TESTING
A. The electrical work shall be free from improper grounds, and from short circuits. The correctness of the wiring shall be verified first by visual comparison of the conductor connections with connection diagrams. Next, individual circuit continuity checks shall be made by using electrical circuit testers. Last, the correctness of the wiring shall be verified by the actual electrical operation of the electrical and mechanical devices. Any deviation from the wiring indicated on the Plans, or accepted Drawings, shall be corrected and indicated on the record drawings. 485
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0000 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Each conductor shall be identified as required by the Contract Documents. This identification shall be indicated on the record drawings to enable rapid and accurate circuit tracing by maintenance personnel.
3.8 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
A. Single line diagrams, as indicated on the Drawings, show circuit voltages, circuit protection rating, and other pertinent data. Where conflicts exist on the Drawings, the single line diagrams shall take precedence. Grounding conductors are not necessarily indicated. See grounding requirements specified elsewhere herein.
END OF SECTION 26 0000
486
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0001 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section outlines the wiring requirements for the electrical work and forms a part of all other Sections of Division 26 unless otherwise specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the ENGINEER’s approval material lists, shop drawings, factory test reports and technical data to the extent required in this Section.
1.3 WIRING
A. Wiring for Furnished Equipment: The wiring from electrical panels, control panels and motor control centers to the furnished equipment shall include all the required materials and installations to complete the wiring as shown on the Drawings, specified and required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide basic materials and all wiring installations as indicated, specified and required.
2.2 METAL CONDUITS
A. Conduits shall be steel, hot-dipped galvanized and equipped with couplings and thread protector caps. The surfaces and threads shall be corrosion-resistant coated. Conduits shall be in ten foot lengths and manufactured by Jones & Laughlin Steel Co., Allied Tube & Conduit Co., Triangle PWC, Republic, Youngstown, or ENGINEER-approved equal. Conduits shall be a minimum size of 3/4 inch. Supports shall be provided for all conduits.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit shall be provided for all exposed exterior installation unless otherwise indicated and/or specified.
2.3 PVC COATED - METAL CONDUITS
A. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. The PVC coating must have been investigated by UL as providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit.
Ferrous fittings for general service locations must be UL Listed with PVC as the primary corrosion protection. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be new, unused material. Applicable UL standards may include: UL 6 Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel, UL514A Metallic Outlet Boxes, UL514B Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.
B. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be ETL Verified to the Intertek ETL SEMKO High Temperature H2O PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure for 200 hours. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must bear the ETL Verified PVC-001 label to signify compliance to the adhesion performance standard.
C. The conduit shall be hot dip galvanized inside and out with hot galvanized threads.
D. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female fitting opening except unions. The inside sleeve diameter shall be matched to the outside diameter of the conduit.
E. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall have a series of longitudinal ribs 40 mils in thickness to protect the coating from tool damage during installation. 487
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Form 8 Condulets, 1/2” through 2” diameters, shall have a tongue-in-groove gasket to effectively seal against the elements. The design shall be equipped with a positive placement feature to ease and assure proper installation. Certified results confirming seal performance at 15 psig (positive) and 25 in. of mercury (vacuum) for 72 hours shall be available.
G. Form 8 Condulets shall be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws.
H. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal 2 mil thickness. Conduit or fittings having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.
I. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30°F (-1°C).
J. All male threads on conduit, elbows and nipples shall be protected by application of a urethane coating.
K. All female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of a urethane coating.
L. Independent certified test results shall be available to confirm coating adhesion under the following conditions.
1. Conduit and condulet exposure to 150°F (65°C) and 95% relative humidity with a minimum mean time to failure of 30 days. (ASTM D1151)
2. The interior coating bond shall be confirmed using the Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test (ASTM D3359).
3. No trace of the internal coating shall be visible on a white cloth following six wipes over the coating which has been wetted with acetone (ASTM D1308).
4. The exterior coating bond shall be confirmed using the methods described in Section 3.8, NEMA RN1. After these tests the physical properties of the exterior coating shall exceed the minimum requirements specified in Table 3.1, NEMA RN1.
M. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. All U bolts will be supplied with plastic encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads.
N. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Installation Manual. To assure correct installation, the installer shall be certified by Manufacturer to install coated conduit.
O. Type 316 stainless steel screws shall be furnished and used to attach the cover to the conduit body.
All coated material shall be installed and patched according to the manufacturer’s recommended installation and patching instructions.
P. Conduit straps shall be PVC coated or 316 stainless steel.
Q. Approved Material: PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit and Fittings as manufactured by PlastiBond, Perma-Cote, Occidental Coating Company, Kor Kap, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.4 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS
A. Nonmetallic conduits shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride as manufactured by Triangle Conduit & Cable, Carlon, or ENGINEER-approved equal. All conduits shall be of one type, and low temperature, corrosion, and moisture resistant.
B. Nonmetallic Conduit may be installed for underground conduit runs which are outside of the buildings and structures and run between buildings and structures. Rigid steel bends and risers shall be used with nonmetallic conduit wherever conduit rises above grade. Each nonmetallic conduit shall contain a code sized grounding conductor.
488
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be provided for short connections to equipment as shown on the drawings and as required which withstand temperatures from -50°F to +220°F.
B. Liquid-tight Conduit shall have an interlocked flexible galvanized steel core with a permanently bonded exterior gray polyvinyl chloride jacket.
C. Conduits l-l/4 inch and smaller shall have an internal copper bonding conductor wound spirally in the space between each convolution for the equipment ground provided by the manufacturer.
D. Conduits 1-1/2 inch and larger shall have external grounding bushings at each end with an external insulated #2 copper bonding conductor connecting them.
E. Separate Ground Conductor shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR in liquid-tight flexible conduits.
F. Manufacturers for liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be Anaconda, Electri-Flex, Universal or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.6 CAST METAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Provide conduit outlet bodies, boxes, fittings, gaskets and covers for lighting outlets, lighting switches, receptacles, control stations, alarm, switch and thermostat outlets, etc. in exposed conduit installations as indicated and required. Cast boxes and fittings shall be finished as specified in Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements. The outlet bodies, boxes, fittings and covers shall be cast iron alloy with threaded hubs, and of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors that shall be enclosed. The materials shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Pyle-National Efcor, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
B. Covers and Gaskets shall be provided for all conduit outlet bodies, boxes and fittings. The covers shall be cast iron alloy and equipped with neoprene gaskets.
C. PVC Coated Fittings shall have the same polyvinyl chloride coating that is on the conduit to which they shall be connected. The PVC coating shall be bonded to the surfaces of cast outlet bodies, boxes, fittings and supports by Occidental Coating, Kor-Kap, Robroy, Youngstown, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Plastic Fittings shall be solvent weld type, and shall match the conduit to which they shall be connected.
E. Expansion/Deflection Fittings shall be provided as indicated, specified and required. The fittings shall permit movement between two conduits without damage to the conduits and conductors. The expansion/deflection fittings consist of cast metal conduit hubs securely attached to a flexible outer neoprene jacket. A flexible copper grounding strap shall be provided inside the fitting and connected to the two hubs. The linear expansion or contraction shall be a movement up to 3/4 inch.
The linear misalignment shall be a movement up to 3/4 inch. The angular misalignment shall be a movement up to 30 degrees. The expansion/deflection fittings shall provide flexible and watertight conduit joints.
F. Thread Lubricant shall be provided for all metal conduit threads. The lubricant shall inhibit corrosion and maintain grounding continuity, and shall be Crouse-Hinds STL, Thomas and Betts "Koper-Shield" or ENGINEER-approved equal.
G. Couplings and Elbows shall be of the same type as the conduit to which they shall be connected, except where rigid steel bends and risers are connected to nonmetallic conduits where conduits rise above grade. For metallic conduits, the couplings and elbows shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized, threaded and one-piece. For plastic conduits, couplings and elbows shall have plain ends for tight weld fits, which form watertight joints.
489
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.7 STEEL BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Provide the steel boxes and fittings as indicated and required.
B. Pull Boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the connected conduits and enclosed conductors. Boxes 24 inches square and smaller shall have gasketed screw type covers. Larger boxes shall have bi-parting gasketed hinged doors with latch mechanisms, handles and cylinder locks complete. Provide two keys for each lock. Pull boxes shall be painted as specified in Sections 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements and 26 0533 – Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes. The pull boxes shall be Hoffman, Boss, Circle A-W, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.8 WATER SEAL FITTINGS
A. Provide the malleable iron water seal fittings connected to rigid steel conduits as indicated, specified and required.
B. Sealing Bushings shall be provided on the ends of exterior underground conduits that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall consist of a thick neoprene sealing ring secured between two metal plates by socket head screws. When the conduit sealing bushing is in place and the screws are tightened, the neoprene shall become compressed between the metal plates and be forced against the conduit inside wall and also against the conductor insulation to form a watertight seal inside the conduit.
C. Wall and Floor Seals shall be provided to completely seal the areas around the conduits that pass through concrete walls and floors. Seals shall have a neoprene grommet between two pressure rings, which provides a watertight seal on the outer surface of the entering conduits.
2.9 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Provide all the hot-dip galvanized steel and iron conduit fittings required to complete the wiring installations.
B. Liquid-tight Conduit Fittings shall be Types LT, ST, CT as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Pyle-National, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Union shall be provided, as required, for conduit connections to threaded outlet bodies, boxes, and equipment, for connecting two steel conduits together. Unions shall be type UNY or UNF. Running threads are not acceptable. Union shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Pyle-National, or ENGINEERapproved equal.
D. Bushing Reducers shall be provided in conduit fitting hubs for connections to smaller conduits.
Reducers shall be Appleton, Thomas and Betts, Efcor, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
E. Conduit Enlargers shall be provided for connecting two conduits of different sizes together. The enlargers shall be Appleton, Thomas and Betts, Efcor, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
F. Locknuts shall be provided on the threads of conduits that enter through close fitting openings in enclosures. Locknuts shall have notches all around for tightening with a screwdriver. Locknuts shall be Appleton, O-Z, Thomas and Betts, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
G. Metallic Insulated Bushings with ground terminals shall be provided on the ends of threaded steel conduits and nipples that terminate through openings in sheet steel enclosures. The malleable iron grounding bushings shall have smooth and well rounded surfaces to protect the conductor insulation. The conduit threads shall be deep, clean and easily attached to the conduits. The bushings shall be O-Z, Efcor, Thomas and Betts, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
H. Plugs shall be the recessed type and installed in all unused conduit fitting hubs and couplings. Plugs shall be Appleton, Crouse-, or ENGINEER-approved equal. 490
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
I. Interchangeable Hubs shall be provided for rigid steel conduit connections to sheet steel enclosures.
The interchangeable hub shall have an insulated throat, sealing ring and vibration-proof nut.
Machined serrations on hub and nut shall bite into the metal enclosure assuring an equipment ground. The hubs shall be Myers "Scru-Tite," "Efcor" "Space-Saver", or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.10 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors and cables shall be new, single conductor, copper, not smaller than #12 AWG (except fixture wire or control power conductors) unless otherwise indicated, and as shown on the Drawings. No running splices will be allowed for new conductor installations. Where modifications to existing conductor runs, and conductors are unable to be replaced, an acceptable means of splicing would be to use STA-KON butt splice or ENGINEER-approved, with heat shrinkable insulating cover (T&B cat #H5 or ENGINEER-approved equal). Use calibrated T&B #WT145C ratchet tool, or ENGINEER-approved equal, for compression connections at all STA-KON, or equivalent, terminals and connectors.
B. Steel Interlocked Armor cables shall be provided for power circuits to the motors when called for on the Drawings. The cables shall be 600 volts, three conductor, rated 90 degrees centigrade and stranded copper. The conductors shall be individually polyethylene insulated, grouped together with fillers and ground wires, and covered with binding tape. The cable shall be enclosed in an interlocked aluminum or galvanized steel armor that shall be protected with a polyvinylchloride outer jacket. The interlocked armor cables shall be approved for submersible pump power wiring installations. The power cables shall be manufactured by General Electric, Okonite, Cyprus or ENGINEER-approved equal. The power cables shall be securely attached to steel messenger cables with stainless steel binding tape as shown on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conductors shall be stranded, 600 volts, cross-linked polyethylene insulation (XLPE), Type XHHW-2. Conductors shall be manufactured by Rome, American Insulated Wire Co., Cablec Co., or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Ground and Neutral Conductors shall be provided for the required ground and neutral wiring.
1. The insulated ground and neutral conductors shall be the same type as the phase conductors.
2. Bare ground conductors shall be copper, soft drawn, annealed, concentric lay, stranded conforming to ASTM Specifications B3 and B8.
E. Control power conductors shall be type THHN/THWN-2 stranded #14 gauge with manufacturer sequential number identification on exterior of insulation jacket.
F. Instrumentation Signal Cables shall be Type TC single twisted pair or multi twisted pairs of stranded, copper cables with 600-volt, 15-mil polyvinyl chloride insulation over each conductor, overall aluminum-mylar tape shield, overall tinned copper drain wire, and 45-mil minimum polyvinyl chloride jacket overall, 90°C dry/75°C wet rating. Twisted pair cables that are required to be shielded, shall have aluminum-mylar tape shields and tinned copper drain wires over individual twisted pairs of cable. Single twisted pair cables shall be #16 AWG minimum. Cables shall be manufactured by Belden, Okonite, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
G. Wire Lubricant shall be provided to ease the pulling of cables and conductors in conduits. The lubricant shall be Aqua Gel, Polywater, or ENGINEER-approved equal. “Yellow 77” is not acceptable.
2.11 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Connectors shall be provided for splices and terminal connections of all copper conductors and cables. The connector shall fit the conductor to which it shall be connected, and the assembly shall have joint contact surfaces not less than 50 percent.
B. High voltage conductors (480V) shall be terminated in junction boxes using appropriately sized Weidmuller terminal blocks, color-coded:
491
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Green Grounding Conductors
White or Gray Neutral/Grounded Conductors
Black, Red, or Blue Medium Voltage Conductors (120V-240V) Brown, Orange, and Yellow High Voltage Conductors (480V) C. Compression Connectors for No. 8 AWG and larger shall be copper lugs for terminal connections, and two-way copper sleeves and taps for splice connections. A crimping tool shall be provided to make tight and neat compression connections. The connectors and crimping tool shall be AndersonSquare D, Thomas and Betts, Buchanan or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Tapered Spring Connectors shall have live springs attached to inner steel housings and enclosed with plastic insulators. Connectors shall be provided for No. 10 AWG conductors and smaller, and shall be Buchanan Type B2, Scotchlok Type B, Thomas and Betts Type PT, or ENGINEERapproved equal.
E. Ground Clamps shall be provided for cable connections to ground rods and metal pipes as shown on the Drawings. Clamps shall be copper alloy, heavy duty, corrosion resistant and consist of Ubolts and saddles with bolted cable connections. The ground clamps shall be O-Z, Thomas and Betts Burndy, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
F. Electrical Tape shall be plastic, 0.007 inches thick, and resistant to abrasion, alkalies, acids, corrosion, moisture, low and high temperatures. The tape shall be Scotch No. 33 Plus, Plymouth Premium Black No. 4453, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
G. Wire Markers shall be provided to identify each conductor at equipment terminals, and in intermediate junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes. At motor control centers and control panels, identify each motor or other electrical device circuit conductor with the motor or device number shown on the drawings and with the terminal number of the motor control center or control panel to which the conductor is connected. At motor and device terminals, at control stations, and in junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each motor or device circuit conductor with the terminal number of the motor control center or control panel to which the conductor is connected. In addition to identifying each conductor with the terminal number, in junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each group of conductors forming a motor or device circuit with the motor or device number shown on the drawings. At panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes, identify each panelboard circuit conductor with the panelboard number and circuit number. The individual conductor wire markers shall be adhesive and manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Brady, Scotch 3M, or ENGINEER-approved equal. The wire marker to identify groups of conductors shall be nylon cable tie markers as manufactured by Brady, Seaton, Thomas and Betts, Panduit, or ENGINEER-approved equal. The marker pads on the cable tie markers shall be large enough to show the motor or device numbers.
The motor or device numbers on the cable tie markers shall be 3/16 inch high minimum and shall be applied to the marker pads using marking pens for the purpose which shall be provided by the manufacturer of the cable tie markers. When a device is not numbered on the drawings, use a short descriptive title or assign numbers and provide the OWNER with a list of the devices and assigned numbers. Electrical devices include items such as solenoid valves, vibrators, horns, heaters, analyzers, computers, instruments, etc.
2.12 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be factory assembled, metal enclosed, dead front and equipped with bus, time switches, contactors, terminals and thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers as shown on the drawings.
492
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Circuit Breakers shall be molded case, quick-make, quick-break, single and multipole, and bolted type. Each circuit breaker shall have clear indications for "ON," "OFF", and "TRIP" positions. The minimum interrupting capacity shall be 10,000 symmetrical amperes at 240 volts. As indicated, provide devices to lock the branch circuit breaker in the "ON" and "OFF" positions. Ground fault protection, 5 milliampere sensitivity, shall be provided for the indicated 120 volt branch circuits, which shall be an integral part of the regular branch breaker. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than the regular single pole circuit breaker.
C. Copper Bus shall be provided for panelboards. Bus shall be provided for the complete length of the panelboard branch circuit area including circuits indicated as spaces. Bus bars shall be drilled and tapped for the indicated spaces for installation of future circuit breakers.
D. Single Phase Panelboards, three wire, shall be bussed so that any two adjacent single-pole breakers shall be connected to opposite polarities. A single handle two-pole circuit breaker can be installed in any location, and in place of two adjacent single pole breakers.
E. Terminals and connectors shall be provided for the feeder, neutral and branch conductors shown on the Drawings.
F. Circuit Numbers shall start at the top of the panelboard. Odd numbers shall be assigned in sequence on the left side, and even numbers shall be in sequence on the right side of the panelboard.
G. The Cabinet shall enclose the bus and breaker assembly, and shall be steel fabricated and coated with corrosion-resistant finish as specified in Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements and 26 2716 – Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. The front of the panelboard shall include a trim, hinged door, flush cylinder lock with catch. The lock shall be furnished with two keys, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall not be removable when the door is in the locked position.
H. Contactors shall be provided as indicated and specified in this Section.
I. Metal Circuit Directory frame and card with clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4-inch high and 3 inches long for each branch circuit. The card shall be completely typed to identify each connected and spare circuit.
2.13 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. The motors shall be furnished and installed with the driven equipment as indicated and specified per plans.
B. Motor Wiring shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. Include the wiring interconnections between the motors, motor starters, control panels and controls as required.
C. Control Power shall be 120 volts, single phase and 60 hertz unless otherwise indicated. A separate control transformer shall be provided for each motor magnetic starter, contactor and grouped relays as indicated.
D. Contactors shall be provided for circuits as shown on the Drawings, specified and required. The contactor shall be electrically held unless otherwise indicated, 600 volt, 60 hertz, industrial duty, and connected to 120 volts AC circuit with remote control device. The drawings shall indicate the number of poles and ampere ratings for the contactors and the locations, which shall be mounted inside motor control centers, panelboards or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Enclosures shall be finished as specified in Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements and 26 2716 – Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. The silver alloy power contacts shall be load break within the rating of the contactor without assistance from additional arcing contacts. The magnetic coil shall be continuous duty, encapsulated and easily removable. The magnet shall provide rapid action on pickup or dropout and satisfactory operation without hum. The 120 volt circuit shall be provided by an individual control power transformer for each contactor. The contactors shall be Square D Class 8903, Cutler-Hammer Type C30, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 702, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
493
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.14 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Circuit breakers, fuses, relays and other protective devices that protect the conductors and equipment against overload currents and short circuit currents shall be provided as indicated, specified and required. The circuit breakers shall be coordinated as specified in this Section and Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements and 26 2822 – Low Voltage Circuit Breakers.
B. Circuit Breakers shall be molded case type unless otherwise indicated. Breakers shall be quickmake and quick-break on manual or automatic operation. The drawings shall indicate the number of poles and ampere trip ratings. The handle mechanism shall be trip-free which prevents holding the contacts against overload or short circuit conditions.
1. The thermal device shall provide time-delay tripping on overloads, and the magnetic device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short circuits. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of the circuit breaker on frame sizes above 100 amperes. Non-automatic breakers shall have no tripping devices, and shall be used for manual switching of circuits. Molded case thermal-magnetic circuit breakers shall have at least the following interrupting capacities in symmetrical amperes at 480 volts unless otherwise indicated.
a. 100 Ampere Frame - 22,000.
b. 225 Ampere Frame - 22,000.
c. 400 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
d. 600 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
e. 800 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
f. 1,000 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
g. 1,200 Ampere Frame - 30,000.
h. 2,000 Ampere Frame – 65,000.
i. 2,500 Ampere Frame - 65,000.
j. 4,000 Ampere Frame - 65,000.
2. Solid state circuit breakers shall be equipped with programmers, integral current sensors, logic and trip circuitry, sensor-powered shunt trips and integral ground fault protection. The programmer shall include silicon transistors, silicon diodes, silicon controlled rectifiers and printed circuitboards to assure the circuit breaker's reliability and stability. Each printed circuit board shall be given a protective epoxy coating to prevent moisture absorption, fungus growth and signal leakage. Gold plated surfaces shall be provided on all electrical connectors and adjustment taps. Sensing power and signals shall be derived from three current transformers inside the circuit breaker, which shall supply power to the solid state programmer. The trip shall utilize logic circuitry contained in the programmer. The ampere setting shall be a tap adjustment which selects the continuous current setting of the breaker.
These tap adjustments shall be made with knobs on the front of the programmers. Regulated DC power shall be provided by the full wave rectifiers and filters in the power supply. There shall be individual signals from the programmer which shall trip the breaker on overloads, short circuits, ground faults and high temperatures. The interrupting capacity for the solid state circuit breaker shall be 100,000 symmetrical amperes at 480 volts, unless otherwise indicated. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "off" position with a padlock.
3. Molded plastic housings that contain standard molded case circuit breakers and current limiters connected to the load side of the breakers shall be provided as indicated. The circuit breaker shall be ambient temperature compensated, and shall be provided with thermal overload protection. The integrally fused circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting short circuit currents up to 100,000 symmetrical amperes at 480 volts, unless otherwise indicated.
The time current limiting characteristics of the fuses shall be coordinated with the time current tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker. The fuse limiters shall be individually interlocked with the breaker element tripping mechanism so that no fuse can be inserted or removed until the circuit breaker is in the "off" position. An interlock shall be provided so the circuit breaker cannot be closed if a fuse limiter is either missing or has blown. Fuse 494
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
limiters shall be individually removable from the molded case housing. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "off" position with a padlock.
4. Motor circuit protectors shall be provided as shown on the drawings. They shall be molded case magnetic-trip-only circuit breakers. Each pole shall provide instantaneous protection by means of a single adjustable magnetic element that trips all currents equal or above the trip setting. The single adjustment screw shall adjust all poles simultaneously. Tripping shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuring a position midway between the manual "OFF" and "ON" positions. All poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously. The contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy. It shall be possible to lock the operator handle in the "OFF" position with a padlock.
5. As indicated, motor circuit protectors shall be provided with current limiters having an interrupting capacity of 100,000 amperes, unless otherwise indicated. The MCP and limiter shall be fully coordinated so the motor circuit protector shall open all three poles if the limiter operated. The current limiters shall be so constructed that they can only be replaced by an identical or similar limiter having the same interrupting capacity. It shall be possible to lock the motor circuit protector handle in the "OFF" position with a Padlock.
6. The circuit breakers shall be mounted inside low voltage switchgears, motor control centers, switchboards or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Breakers shall be equipped with indications for the "trip","on", and "off" positions, and connectors that fit the conductors shown on the drawings. Submittal shall include complete descriptive data, technical data and manufacturers Certified Test Reports for circuit breakers 600 amperes and larger. The molded case circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Fused Switches shall be provided in metal enclosures that are suitable for locations shown on the Drawings. Each switch shall be industrial type, heavy duty, horsepower rated, quick-make, quickbreak and equipped with fuses, cover-handle interlock, "ON-OFF" indications and feature to lock the operating handle in the "OFF" position. The drawings shall indicate the volts, amperes and number of poles. The switches shall include connectors that shall fit the conductors shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be Fusetron or Low-peak dual-element type and capable to interrupt 200,000 amperes, unless otherwise indicated. Ratings for volts and amperes shall be shown on the drawings. The enclosure shall be finished as specified in Section 26 2716. On the front of the enclosure, attach a plastic nameplate that identifies the load. The fused switches shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Overload Relays shall be provided in each phase of all circuit breakers and magnetic starters to properly protect the conductors and equipment that shall be connected on the circuits. Provide one spare overload relay for each overload relay provided.
E. Overcurrent Protection Device Coordination. All overcurrent protection devices on this project shall be coordinated so that they will perform as follows:
1. When two or more overcurrent protective devices in series with each other experience current flow greater than their rated current, the device with the lowest rated current shall trip and/or open the circuit first and thereby prevent the higher rated devices from operating.
2. The Supplier of the circuit breakers shall prepare a coordination study to verify the above stated performance requirements. The study shall be documented by the Supplier and the documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Manufacturer's overcurrent device operating curve printed on transparent paper for each overcurrent device. In the case of fuses, both minimum melt and maximum clearing time curves shall be included.
b. One reproducible copy of all project single line diagrams so marked to show which operating curve applies to each overcurrent device on the diagram (the operating curves shall also be correspondingly marked).
495
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 10
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
c. A tabulation of the required settings of all of the adjustable overcurrent devices so that the performance requirements is met. This documented coordination study shall be submitted for review before the overcurrent devices are supplied for the project. Circuit breakers which have ground fault protection features are specifically required to meet this performance requirement.
2.15 WIRING DEVICES
A. Receptacles and switches shall be specification grade, heavy duty and provided in galvanized steel and cast metal boxes with covers as identified and located on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the device phenolic color shall be ivory for all flush duplex receptacles and local switches, and their coverplates. Unless otherwise indicated the device phenolic color shall be brown for all duplex receptacles and local switches which are installed in surface mounted boxes.
Galvanized steel boxes shall be installed in the walls for flush devices. All surface device outlets shall have cast iron boxes.
B. Convenience Receptacles, for exterior installations, shall be single, grounding type, polarized, NEMA 5-15R, rated 20 amperes and 125 volts AC, and shall have side screw terminals for copper wire unless otherwise indicated equipped with ground fault capabilities. The metal coverplate shall attach to the box with corrosion resistant screws. The plug opening in the coverplate shall have an ethylene propylene rubber gasket. Attached to the coverplate shall be a stainless steel hinge-spring metal cover. The receptacles shall be ivory and manufactured by Hubbell, Slater, P&S, Arrow Hart, General Electric, or ENGINEER-approved equal. The convenience outlet shall be weatherproof with the hinged cover closed. Also, the outlet shall be weatherproof with the hinged cover open and a cord plug attached to the receptacle. The coverplate shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Intermatic or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Local and Weatherproof Switches shall be toggle type, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC, and equipped with side screw terminals for copper wire. Single-pole switches shall be #1221, #1991, #4901 brown and ivory. Three-way switches shall be #1223, #1993, #4903 brown and ivory.
The switches shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Slater, P&S, Arrow Hart, General Electric, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.16 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide the non-fusible disconnect switches, as indicated, specified and required.
B. Switches shall be steel enclosed, heavy duty, NEMA 12 and NEMA 4X as required, 2-pole and 3-pole, 250 volt and 600 volt, ampere rating as indicated, and finished as specified in Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements. On the front of the enclosure, attach a plastic nameplate that identifies the load. Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Square D, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Mechanisms shall have quick-make and quick-break operating handles and provisions for padlocking in the "OFF" position. The switch shall have an interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the hinged cover when the switch is in the "ON" position, and an interlock to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the hinged cover open.
D. Copper Lugs shall be included for the copper wire connections. The lug shall fit the conductor which shall be connected to the lug.
2.17 SUPPORTS
A. Provide the 316SS and PVC coated metal channels, fittings, stanchions, clamps, hangers, and required hardware to support all conduit and equipment as required. 496
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 11
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Channels shall be 316SS and cold rolled. One side of the channel shall have a continuous slot. On both sides of the slot, the edges turn inward and forms a guide for the spring nuts. The fittings shall be fabricated from 316SS and attached to the channel with bolts and spring nuts. The channel, fittings and hardware shall be 316SS and manufactured by Unistrut, GTE Products Co., Ideal Industries, Josyln Mfg & Supply Co., or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. One-Hole Clamps shall be 316SS and equipped with clamp-backs. The clamps shall be Efcor, Thomas and Betts, Appleton, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Beam Clamps shall be 316SS, right angle and parallel types. The clamps shall be manufactured by Efcor, Thomas and Betts, Appleton, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
E. Spacers shall be plastic and provided to support underground conduits for concrete encasements.
The spacers shall be Carlon, Johns-Manville, Underground Products, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
F. Anchors shall be 316 stainless steel, sleeve and stud types for securing equipment to concrete foundations, floors and walls. The anchors shall be Phillips "Red Head", Diamond, or ENGINEERapproved equal. Concrete foundation to include 4” housekeeping pad.
G. Toggle Bolts shall be 316 stainless steel, spring wing type for securing equipment to hollow walls and ceilings. Toggle bolts shall be Phillips "Red-Head", Diamond, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
H. Conduit Hangers shall be heavy gauge 316 stainless steel and equipped with carriage bolts, 1/4- inch rods and nuts. The hangers shall be Efcor, Appleton, Ideal Industries, Josyln Mfg & Supply Co., or ENGINEER-approved equal.
I. U-Bolts shall be heavy gauge 316 stainless steel, and equipped with two hexagon steel nuts. The U-bolts shall be Efcor, Kindorf, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
J. Hardware shall be provided to securely attach all equipment and materials.
2.18 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided as indicated to identify equipment, and the positions and circuits within the equipment. Also, individually enclosed equipment shall be provided nameplates as indicated.
B. The Nameplates shall be laminated black plastic with ¼-inch high white letters, NEMA ES-1, 3-ply, 1/l6-inch thick, beveled and satin finished. Nameplate inscriptions shall include the identifications for the equipment and loads and shall identify the controls on control equipment as shown on the Drawings.
C. Plastic Nameplates shall be provided for switchgears, motor controllers, substations, service equipment, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, and individually enclosed circuit breakers, disconnect switches, magnetic starters, relays, manual starters and control stations unless otherwise indicated. Provide lighting switch nameplates as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the wiring installations and equipment installations, including connections and interconnections as indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the Drawings.
B. Excavations and Backfills. Earthwork shall be performed for equipment foundations, supports and underground conduits as indicated and as specified.
497
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 12
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Concrete shall be provided for electrical equipment foundations, support foundations and conduit encasements as indicated and as specified. Concrete foundation to include 4” housekeeping pad.
D. Painting. Painting shall be provided all for exterior exposed surfaces. Field damaged finishes on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal in quality and color to the original. Finish shall be Desert Beige as approved by the OWNER.
E. CONTRACTOR shall provide structural design calculations for mounting and anchoring of fabricated assemblies, transformers, panels, other mounted equipment and support structures, signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer (civil/structural) currently licensed in the same state as the final installation. Calculations shall include seismic considerations for the location of installation.
3.2 RACEWAYS
A. Provide all the cable tray and conduit installations, including the outlet bodies, boxes, gaskets, covers, fittings and supports to complete the raceway systems as shown on drawings and as required. Install ground conductors in all conduits.
B. Exposed Installations. The installations shall be completed with hot-dipped galvanized cable trays, rigid steel conduits and intermediate steel conduits with wrench tight connections. In hazardous areas, only rigid steel hot-dipped galvanized conduits shall be installed. In corrosive areas, PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduits shall be installed. Maintain a minimum clearance of 12 inches for conduits that shall be installed near hot pipes or surfaces (150°F or higher). Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to buildings and structures.
C. Flexible Conduits. Flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight with fittings for short tight connections (30 inches maximum) to equipment, except in Class 1, Division 1 areas. A separate ground conductor shall be installed in flexible conduit.
1. Flexible Couplings. The couplings shall be explosion-proof with fittings for short, flexible, tight connections to equipment in Class 1, Division 1 hazardous areas.
D. Threads. All steel conduit threads shall be coated with a corrosion resisting lubricant, and the connections shall be made watertight. The lubricant shall maintain the grounding continuity.
2. Locknuts and Bushings. Locknuts and bushings shall be installed on the threads of steel conduits that enter through close-fit openings in enclosures.
E. Sealing Bushings. The bushings shall be installed on the ends of exterior conduits that terminate at indoor equipment. The bushing shall provide a water-tight seal inside the conduit.
F. Seal Fittings. Seal fittings shall be connected to rigid steel conduits in hazardous areas to prevent gases and flames to pass from one area to another through the conduit system. Also, sealing fittings shall be installed to completely water seal inside conduits and the areas around steel conduits that pass through concrete floors and outside walls.
G. Expansion/Deflection Fittings. Expansion/Deflection fittings shall be connected to steel conduits as indicated and required.
H. Penetrations. Penetrations through concrete for sleeves and conduits shall be approved by the OWNER. Submit the sizes, locations and methods for all penetrations.
I. Stub-ups. All steel conduit stub-ups shall be painted per requirements in Pertinent Sections.
Conduits shall be painted a minimum of 4 inches above and below concrete slabs. Finish shall be applied before concrete is poured. Identify spare stub-ups under control panels, motor control centers and switchboards with tags as to the location of the termination of the conduit at the other end.
J. Terminations. Conduits entering equipment, including control panels, motor control centers, switchboards, etc. shall enter in the same vertical section in which the circuit will terminate. Tag conduits at each end for identification.
498
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 13
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
K. Tool Marks. Conduits and fittings that have tool marks shall be smoothed and finished with paint that matches the original finish.
L. Conduit Through Roof. Provide a watertight seal around the conduit on the roof. Coordinate the work with the roofing contractor.
M. Furnished Equipment. Provide conduit installations as shown on the Drawings, and specified in other Sections of the Specifications for furnished equipment.
N. Alterations. Alterations to existing installations shall be completed as indicated and specified.
3.3 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Outlet bodies, boxes, gaskets, covers, fittings and supports shall be installed as indicated, specified and required.
B. Cast Iron. Cast iron outlet bodies, boxes, gasketed covers and fittings shall be connected to exposed galvanized rigid steel conduits.
C. Sheet Steel. Sheet steel boxes shall be provided with close-fit holes for steel conduit connections.
Weatherproof boxes shall be provided with interchangeable conduit hubs for steel conduit connections as indicated.
D. Interchangeable Hubs. The hubs shall be installed in steel enclosures for rigid steel conduit connections. Cut a close fitting hole in the sheet steel enclosure and place the interchangeable hub in the opening. Connect the hub on the conduit and make a tight connection to the enclosure.
E. The purpose of all circuits shall be legibly identified at the panel, receptacles, junction boxes and equipment in a permanent manner (i.e., etched plates, conductor tag, permanent marker). The labeling shall include panel circuit number, “To” and “From” identification and marked “Spare” where applicable.
3.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Install all the conductors and cables for the wiring as indicated, specified and required.
B. Conductors. Conductors shall be completely installed and connected. Apply wire lubricant to ease the pulling of conductors in conduits. Recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded. Splice and terminal connections shall be made tight with spring and compression connectors. The connectors shall be crimped with a tool that provides uniform and tight connections. Connectors shall be sized as outlined in paragraph on Wire Connectors in this Section. Include all the required wiring interconnections. When routing conductors and cables through precast concrete pull boxes and manholes, the longest (not shortest) route from entrance to exit shall be used.
C. Insulate. All connections shall be insulated as required with tight wraps of plastic tape. Apply insulation putty to fill irregularities and voids in splices. High and medium voltage cable splices shall be completed as instructed by the cable manufacturer.
D. Furnished Equipment. Provide wiring installations as shown on the Drawings, and specified in other Sections of the Specifications for furnished equipment.
E. The purpose of all circuits shall be legibly identified at the panel, receptacles, junction boxes and equipment in a permanent manner (i.e., etched plates, conductor tag, permanent marker). The labeling shall include panel circuit number, “To” and “From” identification and marked “Spare” where applicable.
3.5 PANELBOARDS
A. Install and completely connect all the factory assembled panelboards as shown on the Drawings.
B. Elevation. The elevation to the top of the panelboard shall be six feet above grade unless otherwise indicated.
499
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 14
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Clearance Space. Provide at least 1/2-inch clearance between the back of the panelboard cabinet and the RTU Cabinet.
D. Anchor Bolts. Securely attach the panelboard to the wall with anchor bolts.
E. Locking Devices. Attach locking devices on the handles of branch circuit breakers for the "ON" position as shown on the Drawings.
F. Circuit Director Card. Completely type the card to identify each connected and spare circuit.
G. Tight Connections. Provide tight connections for feeder and branch circuit wiring.
3.6 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. Install all the wiring and control equipment as indicated, specified and required.
B. Motors. Motors shall be provided with the driven mechanical equipment.
C. Wiring. The wiring installations shall be complete. Include all the required wiring interconnections between the motor magnetic starters, and between the starters and the instrument control panels.
Provide motor frame conduit connection boxes as required. Be certain that all wiring connections provide the proper motor rotation.
D. Magnetic Starters. The magnetic starters shall be provided in the motor control centers unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Install all the overcurrent protective equipment as indicated, specified and required.
B. Metal Enclosures. The enclosures for individual equipment shall be constructed to satisfy the condition in the location where they shall be installed.
C. Overload Relays. Overload relays shall be provided in the control equipment for three phase and single phase circuits as required. Check the full load amperes for each motor and the overload relay rating. Replace the relays that shall not satisfactorily protect the connected motors.
D. Trip Settings. Circuit breakers shall assure the required circuit protection with the indicated trip settings.
E. Fuses. Provide fuses that have the current and voltage ratings to protect the circuits shown on the Drawings.
3.8 WIRING DEVICES
A. Install the required local switches, convenience outlets and clock outlets complete, including the supports and wiring.
3.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide the complete installations for fused disconnect switches and non-fused disconnect switches where shown on the Drawings and as required.
B. Mounting Height. Switches shall be installed 5 feet from grade or floor to the top of the enclosure unless otherwise indicated.
C. Connections. The steel enclosures shall be connected complete with steel conduits terminating into interchangeable hubs attached to the enclosures. Wire connectors shall be provided for connecting the copper conductors.
3.10 SUPPORTS
A. Install the required structural channels, brackets, stanchions, U-bolts, clamps, anchors, hangers, fittings and other hardware to securely attach and support all the equipment and conduits.
B. Painting. Brackets, stanchions and other unfinished steel supports shall be painted per requirements of "Painting and Protective Coatings" Section of the Specifications. 500
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0001 - 15
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.11 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be positioned and lined-up to provide a neat appearance. They shall be attached to the cleaned metal surfaces of enclosures as directed by the OWNER.
B. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be installed on primary interrupters, switchgears, substations, switchboards, service equipment, motor controllers, motor control centers, panelboards, and individually enclosed circuit breakers, disconnect switches, magnetic starters, manual starters, relays and control stations unless otherwise indicated. Install lighting switch nameplates as indicated on the Drawings.
3.12 CHECKING, ADJUSTING AND TESTING
A. Provide the required labor and equipment, and all checking, adjusting and testing operations on the electrical installations.
B. Check all wire terminals to assure tight connections.
C. Adjust repeat cycle timers, interval timers and time delay relays and other devices so the controls shall operate in the indicated sequence.
D. Wiring Tests. The tests shall be performed to detect wrong connections, short circuits, continuity and grounds. Insulation tests shall be made with a hand crank test instrument on all cables and conductors. NOTE: WARNING. Do not make insulation tests on any conductors either signal or power that are connected to semi-conductor type equipment. Remove the conductors from the equipment before insulation testing; severe damage may result from meggar-type instruments.
Power feeders and branch conductors shall be tested phase to phase, and phase to ground. Phase to ground tests on shielded cable shall mean "conductor to shield". After insulation resistance tests have been performed, high voltage and medium voltage shielded cables shall be "hi-Pot" tested in accordance with the current ICEA Standards and the manufacturer's recommendation. Voltage shall be applied and removed in a slow, even manner, and the conductors shall be grounded for at least one minute after the voltage is removed to insure that no charge remains. Test voltage and application time for the various cables and conductors shall be submitted to the OWNER. Correct any defects in the wiring systems.
E. Equipment Tests
1. Perform equipment tests as indicated and directed by the manufacturer. Refer to Manufacturers' Certified Reports on primary interrupters, substations, switchgears, service equipment and motor control centers.
F. Test Data. Test data for equipment, shielded cables and supply voltage shall be submitted to the OWNER.
G. Supply Voltage. Test the supply voltage while the normal plant loads are operating. If the voltage is not within normal limits (plus or minus one percent), notify the power company and request a voltage correction.
H. Operation Tests. Perform operation tests and observe that all loads operate satisfactorily. Test reports shall be prepared by the contractor, signed and dated when the test was performed and witenessed by and submitted to the DESIGNER for review.
END OF SECTION 26 0001
501
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0126 – MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide testing as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D66-19 Rust-Preventing Characteristics of Inhibited Mineral Oil in the Presence of Water D877
D877M-19
Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes D923-15 Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids
D924-15 Dissipation Factor (or Power Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids
D971-20 Interfacial Tension of Insulating Liquids Against Water by the Ring Method D974-14 Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration D1298–12b Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method
D1500–12 ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale) D1524-15 Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Liquids in the Field D1533-20 Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl Fischer Titration D1816–12 Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using VDE Electrodes
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
43-2013 Testing Insulation Resistance of Electric Machinery. 48-2020 Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 765kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 500kV.
81-2012 Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
95-2012 Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2,300V and Above) with High Direct Voltage.
400-2012 Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems Rated 5kV and Above.
450-2020 Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.
C2-2017 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
C37.20.1-2015 Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage (1,000 VAC and below, 3,200 VDC and below) Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear.
C37.20.2-2015 Metal-Clad Switchgear.
C37.20.3-2013 Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear (1kV-38kV).
C62.33-2016 Metal-Oxide Varistor Surge Protective Components.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. AB 4, Guideline for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. b. PB 2-2011, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
4. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA):
a. Acceptance Testing Specifications (ATS) for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
502
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)
b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Administrative Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:
1. Schedule for performing inspection and tests
a. Include notification dates for special inspections.
2. List of references to be used for each test.
3. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).
4. Sample copy of individual device test form.
5. Sample copy of individual system test form.
C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit within 14 days after completion of test:
1. Test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. In accordance with Operation & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere.
2. After test of inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by ENGINEER and returned, insert a copy of each in operation and maintenance manual.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:
1. Independent 3
rd party organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority.
2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested.
3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologists (NICET), or International Electrical Testing Association and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects.
5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.
6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice.
7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.
8. Recognized as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.7.
B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements established by NETA ATS. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed and certified by equipment manufacturer's representative.
B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be:
1. Scheduled with OWNER and ENGINEER prior to de-energization.
2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating equipment.
D. Notify OWNER and ENGINEER at least 72 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.
503
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Tests specified in this section are to be performed in accordance with the requirements of manufacturer's minimum recommendations, as identified herein, and as detailed in specific equipment specifications.
B. Tests and inspection shall establish that:
1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances.
2. Installation operates as designed and intended by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Equipment is suitable for energization.
4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and IEEE C2.
C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.
E. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents.
G. Realign and shim any improperly aligned equipment to a plumb, level, and square condition.
H. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.
I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified.
J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.
K. Provide proper lubrication to applicable moving parts.
L. Inform OWNER of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Investigate and repair or replace:
1. Electrical items that fail tests.
2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Damaged electrical equipment.
3.2 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES:
A. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.
B. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
C. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
D. Repair or replace, as determined by OWNER, door and panel sections having dented surfaces.
E. Repair or replace, as determined by OWNER, poor fitting doors and panel sections.
F. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.
G. Replace missing or damaged hardware.
H. Finish:
1. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and blemishes.
2. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by OWNER, refinish the entire assembly.
I. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract 504
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
Documents.
J. Grout, caulk, or seal around the base of enclosures to prevent the entrance of moisture, dust, and rodents.
3.3 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical inspection:
1. Physical and insulator damage.
2. Proper winding connections.
3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
4. Defective wiring.
5. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.
9. Verify that tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions.
10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization and prior to loading.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each:
1) Winding-to-winding.
2) Winding-to-ground.
b. 10-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10minutes.
c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.
e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.
2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer.
3.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 AWG and larger for:
a. Physical damage.
b. Proper connections in accordance with Single-Line Diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable.
d. Color coding conformance with NFPA 70 or specifications. e. Proper circuit identification.
505
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Mechanical Connections for:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material.
b. Proper lug installation.
c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables (IC) for:
a. Proper shield grounding.
b. Proper terminations.
c. Proper circuit identification.
4. Control Cables for:
a. Proper termination.
b. Proper circuit identification.
5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than ohmic values established by manufacturer or listed in NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder, 30 amps and larger.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches.
3.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 200 amperes and larger.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper mounting.
2. Proper conductor size.
3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
4. Cracked casings.
5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
6. Operate frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.
7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.
8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75°C rated insulated conductors.
C. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Utilize 1,000-volt DC megohmmeter for 480- and 600-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 506
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b. Short-time pickup and delay.
c. Ground fault pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 3. g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table
3.6 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Visually Check Current, Potential, and Control Transformers for:
a. Cracked insulation.
b. Broken leads or defective wiring.
c. Proper connections
d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
2. Verify Mechanically that:
a. Grounding and bonding connections have good contact. b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly.
3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.
3.7 METERING
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.
2. Verify meter multipliers.
3. Verify that meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
5. Check calibration of electrical transducers.
3.8 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control centers and panelboards assemblies for proper connection and tightness.
2. Ground bus connections in motor control centers and panelboards assemblies for proper termination and tightness.
3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.
5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.
3.9 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 10 hp and larger.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper electrical and grounding connections.
2. Shaft alignment.
3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
507
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 7
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
4. Operate Motor and Check for:
a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b. Overheating.
c. Correct rotation.
d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for function ability and proper operation.
e. Excessive vibration.
5. Check operation of space heaters.
C. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. In accordance with IEEE 43:
1) Motors above 200 hp for 10-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.
2) Motors 200 hp and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds.
2. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers.
3. Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 hp. Investigate index ratios less than
1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class B insulation.
4. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.
6. Verify proper operation of motor moisture and winding temperature protection, and other ancillary devices.
3.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.
3. Proper overload protection for each motor.
4. Improper blockage of air cooling passages.
5. Proper operation of drawout elements.
6. Integrity and contamination of insulation system.
7. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position
8. Check nameplates for proper identification of:
a. Equipment title and tag number with latest Single-Line Diagram b. Pushbuttons
c. Control switches
d. Pilot lights
e. Control relays
f. Circuit breakers
g. Indicating meters
9. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents.
10. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents. 508
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 8
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
11. Check bus connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints:
a. Ohmic value to be zero.
b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
12. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
a. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
13. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of the motor control center or motor controller.
14. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Check for proper conductor identification.
d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.
15. Exercise active components.
16. Inspect contactors for:
a. Correct mechanical operations
b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure
c. Correct torque of all connections
17. Compare overload rating with full-load current for proper size.
18. Compare fuse, motor protector, and circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size.
19. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase. c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase. d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open.
e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Overpotential Tests:
a. Maximum applied AC or DC voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published values. If not available, in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.19. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute for each phase of each bus section. c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
3. Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time:
a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.
4. Control Wiring Tests:
a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 VDC on control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
1) Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum.
5. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. 509
MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0126 - 9
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.11 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.
2. Ground connections to ground bus.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Varistor Type Arrestors:
a. Clamping voltage test.
b. Rated RMS voltage test.
c. Rated do voltage test.
d. Varistor arrester test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 4.7.
END OF SECTION 26 0126
510
SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0500 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0500 SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals, are indicated on the Plans, schedules, and specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this section include the following:
1. One-hole Conduit Straps
2. One-Hole Conduit Straps with Clamp Backs
3. Two-Hole Conduit Straps
4. Conduit Hangers
5. I-beam Clamps
6. Channel Clamps
7. Round Steel Rods
8. Drop-in Anchors
9. Wedge Type Anchor Bolts
10. Lead Expansion Anchors
11. Toggle Bolts
12. Wall and Floor Seals
13. Cable Supports
14. U-Channel Strut System
15. Sleeves
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Abbeon Cal Inc., Ackerman Johnson Fastening Systems Inc., Elcen Metal Products Co., Ideal Industries, Inc., Josyln Mfg and Supply Co., McGraw Edison Co., Rawlplug Co. Inc., Star Expansion Co., U.S. Expansion Bolt Co., Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., B-Line Systems, Inc., Greenfield Mfg Co., Inc., Midland-Ross Corp., O-Z/Gedney Div; General Signal Corp., PowerStrut Div.; Van Huffel Tube Corp., and Unistrut Div; GTE Products Corp., and Robroy Industries.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide supporting devices that comply with manufacturers standard materials, design, and construction, in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installations, and as specified herein.
2.3 SUPPORTS
A. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features:
1. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, and liquidtight flexible conduit; 316 stainless steel; snap-on, heavy duty.
2. One-Hole Conduit Straps with Clamp Backs: For supporting rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; 316 stainless steel.
3. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; 316 stainless steel.
511
SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0500 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
4. Conduit Hangers: For supporting electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, and intermediate metal conduit; 316 stainless steel.
5. I-Beam Clamps: 316 stainless steel.
6. Channel Clamps: 316 stainless steel.
7. Round Steel Rod: National coarse thread, 316 stainless steel.
2.4 ANCHORS
A. Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated, with the following construction features:
1. Lead Expansion Anchors: For CMU walls, 114"-20 threads, set tool required.
2. Toggle Bolts: 316 stainless steel, size as required.
3. Drop-in Anchors: 316 stainless steel, size as required.
4. Anchor Bolts: 316 stainless steel, size as required.
5. Half-round head, non-removable anchor bolts shall not be used.
2.5 SEALS
A. Provide seals of types, sizes and materials indicated; with the following construction features:
1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sized indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.
2. Conduit sealing bushings shall be manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Model CSMI, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
3. The conductor sealing bushings shall be manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Model CSBG, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.6 CONDUIT CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct 2" rigid metal conduit; 3-wires, type wire as indicated; construct body of malleableiron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
2.7 U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, PVC Coated or 316 Stainless Steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with the following fittings that mate and match with U-Channel:
1. Fixture hangers
2. Channel hangers
3. End caps
4. Beam clamps
5. Wiring stud
6. Thin wall conduit clamps
7. Rigid conduit clamps
8. Post Bases
9. U-bolts
2.8 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Provide pipe sleeves from the following:
1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
2.9 PVC COATED U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide PVC Coated U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 20 mil PVC coated steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with all Stainless Steel hardware, and the following fittings that mate and match with PVC Coated U-Channel:
512
SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0500 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1. PVC Coated Strut nut
2. PVC Coated Pipe straps
3. Touch up compound (Gray)
2.10 STAINLESS STEEL U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEM
A. Provide Stainless Steel U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with all stainless steel hardware, and the following stainless steel fittings that mate and match with Stainless Steel U-Channel:
1. Fixture hangers
2. Channel hangers
3. End caps
4. Beam clamps
5. Wiring stud
6. Post bases
7. Rigid conduit clamps
8. U-bolts
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.
B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.
C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of 2 or more parallel runs of conduits to be supported together on channel type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacing indicated and in compliance with NEC requirements.
D. Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturer's recommended values. Ensure that sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.
E. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for touch up of field cut ends or damaged PVC coated U-channel and fittings.
F. Remove burrs and apply a cold zinc galvanizing paint to field cut galvanized U-channel strut.
END OF SECTION 26 0500
513
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0505 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to complete the electrical Work.
2. Utility Companies:
a. Electric Utility Company: Perform the Work in connection with the electric service and utility metering in accordance with requirements of the local utility. Furnish and install duct bank systems with conduits (with pull strings) for the electric utility company’s medium voltage primary feed and 480VAC secondary service lateral as required by the utility-provided design. Furnish and install concrete pads for the utility’s equipment. All work and field coordination shall be in conformance with the serving electric utility’s requirements. CONTRACTOR will pay all fees to establish electrical service(s). Upon project acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the service to be placed in the OWNER’S name. CONTRACTOR shall perform all coordination with electrical utility company and OWNER. b. Communication Company: Perform the Work in connection with the serving communication company. Furnish and install duct bank systems with conduits (with pull strings) for the communication company’s service cables. All work shall be in conformance with the serving communication company's requirements.
CONTRACTOR will pay all fees to establish electrical service(s). Upon project acceptance, arrange for the service to be placed in the OWNER’S name.
CONTRACTOR shall perform all coordination with communication company and OWNER.
3. Power System Study / Arc Flash Hazard Analysis: The CONTRACTOR’s electrical study firm will perform the Power System Study / Arc Flash Hazard Analysis with information provided by to them by the CONTRACTOR (cable lengths, electrical equipment information, etc.). The CONTRACTOR’s electrical study firm will provide the requirements for the arc flash warning labels. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and install the arc flash labels. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure all the field settings of all overcurrent protection devices are set in accordance with the Power System Study. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the requirements of the power system study as specified in 26 0573 Short-Circuit Studies.
B. CONTRACTOR Coordination:
1. Review installation procedures and schedules under other Specification Sections and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that will be installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings, and panels.
2. Coordination and Intent of Electrical Drawings:
a. Dimensions on Drawings or scaling related to equipment are based on equipment of certain manufacturers. Verify the dimensions of equipment furnished to space available at the Site and allocated to the equipment.
b. Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical Work, and are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work. Drawings supplement and complement the Specifications and other Contract Documents relative to principal features of electrical systems.
c. Equipment and devices provided under this Contract shall be properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices for successful operation of complete systems, whether or not all connections and interconnections are specifically mentioned or shown in the Contract Documents.
514
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
d. Drawings are provided for guidance in fulfilling the intent of the Contract Documents Comply with Laws and Regulations, including safety and electrical codes, and provide materials, equipment, appurtenances, and specialty items necessary for complete and operable systems.
3. Field Coordination:
a. Field-verify system and equipment requirements prior to modifying existing systems. b. Coordinate the interface of equipment with OWNER’s personnel and field conditions.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Section 09 9100 – Painting
D. Area Classifications:
1. Dry Locations: Materials, equipment, and incidentals in these locations shall meet NEC and NEMA requirements for dry locations. Conduit systems shall be as specified in Section 26 0534, Conduit for Electrical Systems. Enclosures, pullboxes, and terminal boxes shall be NEMA 12, unless noted otherwise.
2. Wet Locations: Materials, equipment, and incidentals in these locations shall meet NEC and NEMA requirements for wet locations. Conduit systems shall be as specified in Section 26 0534, Conduits for Electrical Systems. Enclosures, pullboxes, and terminal boxes shall be NEMA 4X/3R, unless noted otherwise.
3. Corrosive Locations: Materials, equipment, and incidentals in these locations shall meet NEC and NEMA requirements for the hazardous classification. Conduit systems shall be as specified in Section 26 0534 – Conduits for Electrical Systems. Enclosures, pullboxes, and terminal boxes shall be NEMA 4X Type 316 Stainless Steel, unless noted otherwise.
4. Hazardous Locations: Materials, equipment, and incidentals in these locations shall meet NEC and NEMA requirements for the hazardous classification. Conduit systems shall be as specified in Section 26 0534 – Conduits for Electrical Systems. Enclosures, pullboxes, and terminal boxes shall be UL Listed for the cited hazardous rating, unless noted otherwise.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Component Supply and Compatibility:
1. Materials and equipment similar to each other shall be from the same manufacturer for uniformity.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Permits: Refer to Supplementary Conditions, and other parts of the Contract Documents for responsibilities relative to obtaining and paying for permits, licenses, and inspection fees.
C. Material, equipment and work shall be installed in accordance with the current standards and recommendations of the following publications at a minimum. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive regulation shall apply.
1. 2020 National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
2. 2016 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72).
3. 2013 Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111).
4. 2008 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780).
5. 2006 International Code Council Electrical Code.
6. 2017 National Electrical Safety Code.
7. 2020 NFPA 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment Plants.
D. Work indicated on the Plans is approximately to scale, but actual dimensions and detailed Plans should be followed as closely as field conditions permit. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is governed by field conditions. Installation of systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination. 515
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Discrepancies indicated on different Plans, between Plans and actual field conditions, or between Plans and Contract Documents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification, prior to purchasing and installing equipment.
F. The alignment of equipment and conduit shall be adjusted to accommodate architectural changes, or to avoid work of other trades, without extra expense to the OWNER.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the parts and pieces necessary to the installation of equipment, in accordance with the best practice of the trade, and in conformance with the requirements of these Contract Documents.
H. Items not specifically mentioned in these Contract Documents, or noted on the Plans, or indicated on reviewed shop drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be deemed to be included herein.
I. The CONTRACTOR shall lay out and install electrical work prior to placing floors and walls.
Furnish and install sleeves and openings through floors and walls, required for installation of conduits. Sleeves shall be rigidly supported and suitably packed, or sealed, to prevent ingress of wet concrete. Spacers shall be installed in order to prevent conduit movement. Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and their installation are restrictive dimensions.
J. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install inserts and hangers required to support conduits and other electrical equipment. If the inserts, hangers, sleeves, or other mounting hardware are improperly placed, or installed, the CONTRACTOR shall do necessary work, at their own expense, to rectify the errors.
K. Each conductor shall be identified on both sides and as required by the Contract Documents. This identification shall be on the record drawings to enable rapid and accurate circuit tracing by maintenance personnel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit Shop Drawings and other submittals for each Specification Section as a separate submittal. Do not furnish partial submittals.
2. Review of equipment submittals does not relieve responsibility for providing complete and successfully operating systems.
3. Format and media type of all submittals shall be as directed by the ENGINEER.
B. Action Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to components and numbered terminals for external connections.
b. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations, and panel layouts showing means for mounting, conduit connection, and grounding.
c. List of components including manufacturer’s name and catalog number (or part number) for each.
2. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number. b. Electrical ratings.
c. Manufacturer’s technical data and specifications.
d. Manufacturer’s indication of compliance with applicable reference standards. e. Painting and coating systems proposed.
3. Test Procedures: Proposed testing procedures and testing limitations for source quality control testing and field quality control testing.
516
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Installation data and instructions.
b. Instructions for handling, starting-up, and troubleshooting.
2. Source Quality Control Submittals: Results for required shop testing.
3. Field Quality Control Submittals: Results for required field testing.
4. Qualifications:
a. Wiring coordinator, including information required of wiring coordinator in Paragraph
1.2.A of this Section.
D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Record Documentation:
a. System Record Drawings: Include the following:
1) One-line wiring diagram of the electrical distribution system. 2) Actual, in-place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of conduit sizes and number, and size of conductors.
3) Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the grounding system. 4) Control wiring diagrams, with terminal numbers and control devices identified, for all equipment.
b. Point-to-Point Interconnection Wiring Diagram Drawings: Include the following:
1) External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument, and other devices and wiring to control stations, lighting panels, and motor controllers. 2) Numbered terminal block identification for each wire termination. 3) Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all interconnections. 4) Identification of wiring by the conduit tag in which the wire is installed. 5) Terminal, junction, and pull boxes through which wiring is routed. 6) Identification of equipment and the submittal transmittal number for equipment from which wiring requirements and termination information was obtained. c. Record documents shall indicate final equipment and field installation information.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Performance Criteria:
1. Electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, with ambient outside air temperature of 20°F to 125°F and an elevation of 1200 feet above mean sea level.
2. Unless specified otherwise, electrical equipment shall have ratings based on 75 degrees C terminations.
B. Testing Laboratory Labels: Electrical material and equipment shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory, where standards have been established and label service applies.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
517
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, Laws and Regulations, approved (and accepted, as applicable) Shop Drawings and other ENGINEER submittals, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide tools and equipment required to trace circuits necessary for proper execution of the Work.
3. Define and identify all wiring, circuit terminations, and equipment to be modified to ensure proper interface of components. The Contract Price includes all costs associated with field services specified for a complete and functional system.
B. Staging, Sequencing, and Coordination with Existing Facilities:
1. Schedule, sequence, and install materials and equipment in accordance with OWNER.
2. Perform the Work in a manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment and facilities or cause interruption of the functions of the Site, unless specified otherwise or otherwise allowed by OWNER.
3. Where the Work ties in with existing installations, take precautions and provide safeguards in connecting the Work to existing operating circuits to prevent interruption to existing circuits. Connection of Work to existing circuits shall be performed in the presence of OWNER and ENGINEER.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Quality Control – General:
1. Perform field quality control for electrical Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Site Tests:
1. Prior to requesting certificate of Substantial Completion, demonstrate to ENGINEER that electrical systems and electrically-operated equipment installed or modified under the Contract operates in accordance with the Contract Documents and operates as required. See spec 26 0126 – Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems and 26 0800 – Commissioning of Electrical.
2. Perform the following operational tests on electrical systems:
a. Operate power circuits to verify proper operation and connection to electrical systems materials and equipment, including mechanical key-interlocks for circuit breakers. b. Remove and re-apply power supply to verify specified operation. c. Operate control circuits, including pushbuttons, indicating lights, and similar devices, to verify proper connection and function. Operate all devices, such as pressure switches, flow switches, and similar devices, to verify that shutdowns and control sequences operate as required.
d. Operate lighting systems and receptacle devices to verify proper operation and connections.
e. Demonstrate alarm condition to verify alarm notification is operating properly.
3. Prepare and simulate alarm condition to verify alarm notification is operating properly and submit report on the equipment demonstration and operating field quality control tests.
Report shall include complete information on the tests performed and results.
C. Manufacturer’s Services:
1. Furnish at the Site qualified, factory-trained representative(s) of equipment manufacturers for the services indicated in the Contract Documents.
3.4 ATTACHMENTS
A. The attachment listed below, following the “End of Section” designation, is a part of this Specification Section.
518
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0505 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
1. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION OF PROPER INSTALLATION certificate (one page). Where required in the individual sections for electrical equipment, such as Service Entrance Switchboard, Switchboard, Motor Control Center, Variable Frequency Drives, Panelboards, Transformers, UPS, Fire Alarm System, Electronic Security System, etc., complete the certificate and submit as required.
END OF SECTION 26 0505
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION OF PROPER INSTALLATION
Contract No. and Name: _______________________________________ Equipment Specification Section:__________________________________ Equipment Name: ___________________________________
Contractor: ___________________________________
Manufacturer of Equipment: _____________________________________ The undersigned Supplier of the equipment described above hereby certifies that the manufacturer has checked the equipment installation and that the equipment, as specified in the Contract Documents, has been provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Documents, that the trial operation of the equipment has been satisfactory and the equipment is ready to be placed into service.
Comments:
___________ ____________________________________________ Date Supplier Name (print)
____________________________________________
Signature of Supplier
___________ ____________________________________________ Date Contractor Name (print)
____________________________________________
Signature of Contractor
519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 0519 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish, install, test, and terminate low-voltage cables.
2. Types of cabling required include:
a. Insulated cable for installation in raceways.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:
1. ANSI/NETA ATS, Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
2. ASTM B3, Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
3. ASTM B8, Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft.
4. ASTM F2160, Specification for Solid Wall High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit Based on Controlled Outside Diameter (OD).
5. NEMA TC 7, Smooth Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit.
6. UL 44, Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
7. UL 1277, Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional OpticalFiber Members.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. NEC Article 300, Wiring Methods.
2. NEC Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring.
3. NEC Article 392, Cable Trays.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer’s literature, specifications, and engineering data for low volt insulated cable proposed for use.
b. Manufacturer’s cable pulling calculations for all cables (power and control) that are to be pulled through the jack and bore casing. Calculations shall indicate acceptability of the proposed cables with a proposed pulling setup. Calculations shall be made and submitted for review before ductbanks are installed.
B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Field Quality Control Submittals:
a. Written results of field insulation resistance tests.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Insulated Cable In Raceways:
1. Application: Use for circuits located indoors and outdoors. 520
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 0519 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following:
a. Southwire
b. The Okonite Company
c. American Insulated Wire
d. General Cable
e. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
3. Material: Single or multiconductor type copper cable complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 with flame-retardant, moisture- and heat-resistant insulation rated for 90°C in dry or wet locations, listed by UL.
4. Application: Use UL listed type XHHW-2 for AWG No. 12 and larger. Use UL listed type THHN/THWN-2 for AWG No. 14 and smaller.
5. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than AWG No. 12 for power and lighting and AWG No. 14 for 120-volt control circuits.
6. Stranding: 600-volt cable shall be stranded, except that solid cable, AWG No. 10, and AWG No. 12 may be used for lighting circuits and receptacle circuits.
7. Cables in Cable Trays shall be listed for cable tray use and be installed per NEC 392.
B. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type:
1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following:
a. T&B Sta-Kon
b. Burndy Hylug
c. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
2. For wire sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted type with silver-plated contact faces.
3. For wire sizes up to and including No. 6 AWG, use compression type. Alarm and control wire shall be terminated using forked type connectors at terminal boards.
4. For wire sizes No. 250 KCMIL and larger, use connectors with at least two cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two bolts for joining to apparatus terminal.
5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size. Connectors shall be rated for 90°C, 600 volts.
C. Cable Splices:
1. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Compression-Type Splices: Provide one of the following:
1) Burndy Hylink.
2) T&B Color-Keyed Compression Connectors.
3) Or ENGINEER-approved equal
b. Spring Connectors: Provide one of the following:
1) Buchanan B-Cap.
2) T&B Wire Connector.
3) Or ENGINEER-approved equal
2. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, splices shall be made up with compression type copper splice fittings. Splices shall be taped and covered with materials recommended by cable manufacturer to provide insulation equal to that on conductors.
3. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller, splices may be made up with pre-insulated spring connectors.
4. For wet locations, splices shall be waterproof. Compression type splices shall be waterproofed by sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring thermosetting resin into mold that surrounds the joined conductor. Spring connector splices shall be waterproofed with sealant filler. 521
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 0519 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. Splices shall be suitably sized for cable, rated 90°C, and 600 volts.
D. Wire and Cable Markers:
1. Provide wire and cable markers in accordance with Section 26 0553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
E. Variable Frequency Drive Symmetrical Type Cable:
1. Power Conductors: Three (3) annealed, tinned, stranded copper per ASTM B8, coated per ASTM B33.
2. Insulation: Black cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) per UL44.
3. Ground: Three (3) symmetrically placed bare annealed Class B stranded copper conductors per ASTM B3 and B8 whose cross-section areas shall add to equal the crosssection area of the power conductor size. The conductors shall be in direct contact with the shield and may be tinned or untinned.
4. Shield: Overall annealed 5 mil bare copper tape shield, 50% overlap for 100% coverage OR overall tinned copper braided shield and aluminum polymer tape for 100% coverage.
5. Jacket: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), oil resistant, per UL1277.
6. Voltage insulation: 2000V.
7. Cable size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
8. Splices: Splices in VFD cables shall not be permitted.
9. Connections and Termination: cable and shield terminations and connections shall be in complete accordance with VFD, motor and cable manufacturers published requirements. 1) Manufacturers: General Cable CVTC-VFD; Southwire type TC VFD cable; or ENGINEER-approved equal
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests:
1. Factory-test wire and cable in accordance with UL standards PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cables complete with proper terminations at both ends. Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation.
B. Pulling:
1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil.
2. Pulling tension shall be within limits recommended by wire and cable manufacturer.
3. Use dynamometer where mechanical means are used.
4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means.
C. Bending Radius: Limit to minimum of six times cable overall diameter and in accordance with manufacturer requirements.
D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points.
E. Splices:
1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to termination.
2. Where required, splice as shown and also where required for cable installation. Splices below grade, in manholes, handholes, and wet locations shall be waterproof.
3. Splices are not allowed in conduits.
4. Splices are not allowed in VFD cables.
F. Identification:
1. Identify conductors in accordance with Section 26 0553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
522
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 0519 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2. Identify power conductors by circuit number and phase at each terminal or splice location.
3. Identify control and status wiring using numeral tagging system.
G. Color-code power cables as follows:
1. No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
2. No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, wrapped in overlapping turns to cover an area of at least two inches.
3. Colors: Match color scheme in use at the Site. If the Site does not have an existing color scheme, use the following colors:
System Conductor Color
All Systems Equipment Grounding Green
240/120 Volts
Single-Phase, Three-Wire
Grounded Neutral
One Hot Leg
Other Hot Leg
White
Black
Red
208Y/120 Volts
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
White
Black
Red
Blue
480Y/277 Volts
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Gray
Brown
Orange
Yellow
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:
1. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place, to demonstrate that circuit and equipment are connected properly and will perform satisfactorily, free from improper grounds and short circuits. Document each test performed.
2. Individually test 600-volt cable mechanical connections after installation and before they are put in service, with calibrated torque wrench. Values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Individually test 600-volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service, with Megger for one minute at voltage rating recommended by cable manufacturer or in accordance with ANSI/NETA ATS recommendations.
4. Insulation resistance for each conductor shall not be less than value recommended by cable manufacturer. Cables not meeting recommended value or that fail when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable for full length.
END OF SECTION 26 0519
523
INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLES 26 0523 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0523 - INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLES PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install instrumentation and communication cables.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0534 – Conduits for Electrical Systems
2. Section 26 0553 – Identification for Electrical Systems
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:
1. ASTM A510/A510M, Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel.
2. ASTM B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling (requirements and restrictions of Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) apply.)
4. RS-485, Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems (also known as TIA/EIA-485).
5. UL 13, Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
6. UL 1581, Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords.
7. UL VW-1, Vertical Wire Flame Test.
8. UL 1666, Standard for Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. NEC 725, Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control, Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits.
2. NEC 727, Instrumentation Tray Cable.
3. NEC 800, Communications Circuits.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical information for instrumentation cables and communications cables proposed.
2. Provide pulling calculations for cables to be installed in the jack and bore ductbank.
B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Field Quality Control Submittals: Written report of results of field quality control testing specified in this Section.
524
INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLES 26 0523 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Single and Multiple Shielded Pair Instrument Cable:
1. Bare, soft annealed copper, 7-strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16 AWG minimum (unless indicated otherwise on the drawings / conduit schedule), twisted with aluminum/mylar shield with 25 percent minimum overlap, stranded tinned 20 AWG copper drain wire and PVC outer jacket. Rated for 600 volts. Temperature rated 90-degrees C in dry installations, rated 75-degrees C in wet locations. UL Type TC, UL listed for cable tray use, sunlight resistant. The abbreviation “STP” or “TSP” is used for shielded twisted pair on the Drawings.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide shielded cable of the following:
a. Alpha Wire Company
b. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
3. Cable shall be plenum rated when all or part of the cable is not encased in conduit.
4. Multi pair instrument cable shall have individual pair shielding and overall shielding.
B. Cable Terminals:
1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following:
a. T&B Sta-Kon.
b. Burndy Insulug.
c. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
2. Fork type copper compression terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at terminal blocks.
C. Single Shielded Triad Instrument Cable:
1. Bare, soft annealed copper, 7-strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16 AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum/mylar shield with 25 percent minimum overlap, stranded tinned 20 AWG copper drain wire and PVC outer jacket. Rated for 600 volts. Temperature rated 90- degrees C in dry installations, rated 75-degrees C in wet locations. UL Type TC, UL listed for cable tray use, sunlight resistant. The abbreviation “STT” or “TST” is used for shielded twisted triad on the Drawings.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide shielded cable of the following:
a. Alpha Wire Company
b. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
3. Cable shall be plenum rated when all or part of the cable is not encased in conduit.
D. Shielded Ethernet Category 5e Premises Cable:
1. This cabling is for outdoor applications, process control interface (VFDs, PLCs, etc.), lighting control component interconnections, and anywhere network cables will be routed in the same ductbank, manhole, handhole, or other raceway as AC power cabling.
2. Furnish, install and terminate from each field device to the network switch. a. Suitable Applications: Gigabit Ethernet, 100BaseTX, 100MHz Category 5e. b. Number of Pairs: 4.
c. Total Number of Conductors: 8.
d. AWG: 24
e. Stranding: Solid.
f. Conductor Material: Bare Copper.
g. Color Code: EIA 568.
h. Shield: Double-shielded version with 100% coverage aluminum foil tape plus tinned copper braid.
i. Insulation Material: Polyolefin.
525
INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLES 26 0523 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
j. Outer Jacket Material: PVC, outdoor rated, sunlight resistant, oil resistant. k. Outer Jacket Color: Blue.
l. TIA/EIA Specification: 1005, 568B compliant.
m. UL Flame Test: UL 1666 Riser compliant.
n. Manufacturer: Belden, Model 7957A.
o. Use shielded RJ45 strain relief plug systems by L-com (TDS8PC5) with plugboots (TDS8CVR-BK).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install cables complete with proper terminations at both ends.
2. Install in conduit separate from power cables, unless shown or indicated otherwise.
3. Ground shield on shielded cables at the source end (PLC panel, etc.).
4. Identify conductors in accordance with Section 26 0553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
5. Install and terminate Supplier-furnished cable in accordance with equipment manufacturer requirements and cable manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations, including NEC.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:
1. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with ohmmeter for continuity along full length of cables, and for shield continuity to ground.
2. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to calibrated 4 to 20 mA DC signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4 and 20 mA DC transmitter settings.
3. Replace with new cables the full length of cables that fail test.
4. Test equipment shall be provided by CONTRACTOR.
5. Test all Ethernet cables with a Fluke DSP100 Cable Meter (or equal) testing system. Each cable shall be tested from the connected data jack, control panel, VFD, UPS, etc., to the patch panels. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the network cabling system has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards for performance testing.
Certification shall bear the typewritten name and signature of the person responsible for the work. Certification shall state the unit has passed all tests and is ready to be placed into operation. Provide four (4) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification.
END OF SECTION 26 0523
526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. A ground grid system consisting of the indicated configuration of copper wires, and ground rods, or concrete encased grounding electrodes ("UFERs") shall be provided to minimize station potential gradient irregularities and drain leakage and fault currents to earth.
B. Whether indicated on the Plans or not, neutral conductors, cable shields, metallic conduits, cable terminations, junction boxes, poles, surge arresters, and other non-current-carrying metallic parts of equipment shall be grounded.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A resistance of not greater than 5 ohms shall be provided, unless otherwise specified. Ground resistances shall be measured as herein described. Resistances of systems requiring separate ground rods, rather than a counterpoise, shall be measured separately before bonding below grade. The combined ground resistance of separate systems bonded together below grade may be used to meet the specified ground resistance, but the minimum number of rods indicated must still be provided.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467, ¾-inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.
Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall be driven into the ground until tops of rods are approximately 6 inches below finished grade. In counterpoise systems, tops of ground rods shall be approximately at elevations of counterpoises. Where the specified ground resistance cannot be met with the indicated number of ground rods, additional ground rods, longer ground rods, or deep-driven sectional rods shall be installed and connected until the specified resistance is obtained, except that not more than three additional ground rods shall be required at any one installation. Ground rods shall be spaced as evenly as possible at least 6 feet apart and connected below grade.
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connections above grade shall be made with bolted solderless connectors, and those below grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
A. Service entrance ground wires shall be sized in accordance with 2020 NEC Table 250.66, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. After being located to provide maximum physical protection, exposed ground wires shall be securely attached to structural supports at not more than 2-foot intervals with suitable fasteners. Bends greater than 45 degrees in ground wires are not permitted.
Routing of ground conductors through concrete should be avoided, except where specifically called for in these Documents. When concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit, so as to provide an opening for the ground wire.
The opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation of the ground wire. 527
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
A. Neutral conductors shall be grounded where indicated. Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with 2020 NEC Table 250.122, unless otherwise indicated. Ground wires shall be protected by conduit, where such wires run exposed above grade in non-fence-enclosed areas, or are run through concrete construction. Where concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit, so as to provide an opening for the ground wire. The opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation of the ground wire. Bends greater than 45 degrees in ground wire connections to the ground rods, or counterpoises are not permitted.
2.6 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Equipment frames of motor housings, metallic tanks, metallic equipment enclosures, metal splicing boxes, chain-link fencing, and other metallic noncurrent-carrying metal items, shall be grounded.
Connections to earth shall be made in the same manner as required for system grounding.
Equipment or devices operating at less than 750 volts may be connected to secondary neutral grounding electrodes.
2.7 SURGE ARRESTER GROUNDING
A. Surge arresters shall be grounded. Resistance to ground for intermediate-class arresters shall be not more than 10 ohms and for distribution-class arresters shall be not more than 25 ohms. Ground wire connections shall be not less than No. 4 AWG for distribution arresters and No. 1/0 AWG for intermediate arresters. Connections to earth shall be made in the same manner as required for neutral conductors. Surge arrester grounds may use the same ground wires provided for equipment operating at more than 750 volts. Surge arrester and secondary neutral grounds shall be separate from and independent of each other but both grounds shall be bonded together below grade at the ground rods or may utilize a common counterpoise.
2.8 LIGHTING POLE GROUNDING
A. Base of lighting poles shall be connected to an adjacent ground rod as indicated on Plans. A ground connection from poles back to neutral ground points shall also be provided utilizing equipment grounding conductor.
2.9 METALLIC STRUCTURES
A. Metallic structures and buildings shall be grounded per NEC.
2.10 GROUNDING RINGS
A. When required, grounding rings shall be installed using bare copper cable with ground rods at least 25 feet intervals using thermoweld connecting means as indicated on Plans in accordance with NEC requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that all device and equipment grounds shall be run as a separate conductor in the conduit from the equipment to the distribution panels or system ground.
Wireways and enclosures shall be properly bonded and grounded, and ground conductors shall be run for all circuits.
B. Equipment cases and devices shall be grounded. Ground rods shall be driven, and concrete encased conduits installed, before a building, or structure is built, and ground conductors brought through the concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment. These systems shall be installed at each structure, where transformers, switchboards, panelboards, and MCCs are installed.
C. Duct banks shall contain a concrete encased system bare copper ground conductor. The system ground conductors shall run continuously in duct banks, through manholes, handholes, pullboxes 528
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
and other raceway boxes. The system ground shall be connected to the structure grounding systems to provide a continuous grounding system. Each metallic raceway, panel, switchboard, and other metallic devices associated with the electrical and control systems shall be bonded to this grounding system.
D. Ground rod shall be installed not less than 6 inches below grade. Equipment, neutral, and surge arrester ground wires shall be connected to the ground grid as indicated.
3.2 TESTS
A. Pre-Energization Tests - Pre-energization tests shall include, but shall not be limited to tests that the equipment manufacturer’s engineer is required to perform under paragraph "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS." No part of the electrical system shall be energized until all station grounding system components have been tested and demonstrated to comply with the requirements specified, and until associated test reports have been submitted and approved.
B. Operating Test - After the installation is completed, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct an operating test for approval. Equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements herein. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish instruments and personnel required for the test.
C. Ground-Resistance Measurements - Ground-resistance measurements of each ground rod shall be taken and certified by the CONTRACTOR to the DESIGN/BUILDER. No part of the electrical distribution system shall be energized prior to the resistance testing of that system's ground rods and grounding system and submission of test results to the DESIGN/BUILDER. Test reports shall indicate the location of the ground rod and grounding system and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the test was performed. When the building water service is used as a ground or part of the grounding system, ground-resistance measurements shall also be made of this connection. Ground-resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 142 and Std
81. 3.3 TEST RESULTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the above tests and submit a certified test report prior to energizing the equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 0526
529
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 0533 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0533 - OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Outlet, pull and junction boxes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 00 – General Conditions.
2. Division 01 – General Requirements.
3. Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements.
4. Section 26 0526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 26 0534 – Conduit for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 26 2726 – Wiring Devices.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Refer to Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Refer to the Contract Documents.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Galvanized steel boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Steel City
c. Raco
d. Or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2. Sheet metal boxes for non-classified areas:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
3. Corrosion-resistant boxes:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
4. Hazardous location boxes (Class I, II & Ill):
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Killark
d. O-Z/Gedney
e. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
5. Raintight and watertight boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
6. Terminal boxes:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
530
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 0533 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
b. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
7. Boxes in sidewalk:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. O-Z/Gedney
d. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
8. Boxes in earth:
a. Carlon Electric Products
b. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
9. Exposed switch and receptacle boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Or ENGINEER-approved equal
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Pull and Junction Boxes for Offices and other Dry Architecturally Finished Areas:
1. Material: 14 GA, galvanized steel
2. Concentric knockouts on all four sides
3. Flat cover fastened with screws
4. NEMA 1 classification
5. UL listed.
B. Pull and Junction Boxes for General Use Unclassified Areas Suitable for NEMA 12 Enclosures:
1. Material: 14 GA galvanized steel with seams continuously welded, ground smooth and no knockouts.
2. Zinc rich coating on all seams.
3. Stainless steel captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells.
4. Flat door with oil resistant gasket.
5. NEMA 12 classification.
6. UL listed.
C. Pull and Junction Boxes for Wet Areas:
1. Material: 14 GA steel with polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surfaces.
2. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts.
3. Stainless steel clamps on four sides.
4. Flat cover with oil resistant gasket.
5. NEMA 4X classification.
6. UL listed.
D. Pull and Junction Boxes for Corrosive Areas:
1. Material: 14 GA steel with powdered epoxy resin coating inside and out or fiberglassreinforced polyester material.
2. Steel boxes:
a. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts. b. Rolled lip around all sides.
c. Hinged door.
d. Captivated stainless steel door screws.
e. Flat door with oil-resistant gasket.
3. Fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes:
a. Hinged door with latch and lockout.
b. Neoprene door gasket.
c. Grounding bushing(s).
4. NEMA 4X classification.
531
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 0533 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
5. UL listed.
E. Pull and Junction Boxes for Hazardous Areas:
1. Material: Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free cast aluminum.
2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub equipped.
3. Flat bolted-down or threaded cover with neoprene gasket.
4. Stainless steel hex head screws.
5. Explosion proof, UL listed for Class 1 Groups C and D.
F. Pull and Junction Boxes for Sidewalks:
1. Cast-iron box and cover, hot-dip galvanized.
2. Flange for flush mounting.
3. Checkered cover with neoprene gasket, pry bar slots and stainless steel screws.
4. UL listed.
5. Drilled and tapped holes.
6. Watertight NEMA 4X classification.
G. Large Pull and Junction Boxes (100 CU IN and larger):
1. Located in offices and other dry architecturally finished areas where EMT is utilized:
a. NEMA 1 gasketed without knockouts.
2. Located in general use areas:
a. NEMA 12 construction:
1) Welded steel.
2) Furnished with gray enamel inside and out over phosphatized surfaces.
3. Located in wet and corrosive areas:
a. NEMA 4X with stainless steel screws.
4. Constructed of 14 GA steel with seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts.
5. Rolled lip around all sides.
6. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS.
7. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS.
H. Terminal Boxes:
1. Galvanized 16 GA steel box provided with plain blank screw cover, subpanel, and terminal points.
2. Refer to Drawing for dimensions and number of terminals.
3. Terminal blocks shall be screw-post barrier-type, white center marker strip.
4. Rated 20 ampere, minimum 600 V.
I. Fiberglass Cable-Pulling Enclosure:
1. Use: Access points to facilitate pulling of electrical cables in buried conduit runs.
2. Size and quantity: As shown on Drawings.
3. Type: Rectangular fiberglass composite, suitable for direct burial pedestrian traffic on top, - 50°F, chemical, sunlight, and weather resistant.
4. Provide matching top with "ELECTRIC" logo.
J. Outlet Boxes:
1. Use: Installation of wiring devices.
2. Boxes for exposed wiring:
a. Cadmium plated, cast, ferrous metal, with threaded hubs.
3. Boxes for concealed wiring:
a. Code gage, hot-dip galvanized steel.
b. Include bar hangers for metal stud partitions.
c. Provide barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. d. Use extension and plaster rings where required.
e. Provide grounding screw.
532
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 0533 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use locknut and bushing for boxes in non-classified areas.
B. Use cast metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs in hazardous areas.
C. Use Type FS and FD boxes in wet areas and where exposed rigid steel conduit is required.
D. Use epoxy resin coated, stainless steel, cast aluminum or fiberglass boxes for corrosive areas.
E. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs.
F. Use outlet boxes sized to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed.
G. Use boxes sized to accommodate conduit tying into box.
H. Install pull boxes or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections.
1. Make covers of boxes accessible.
I. Install pull boxes or junction boxes rated for the area classification.
J. Install rigid conduit squarely into boxes which do not have hubs or are drilled and tapped.
1. Install with locknut on the outside and bushing on inside.
K. Install conduit into boxes with hubs, or that are tapped, using thread lubricant.
L. Do not use back-to-back boxes on this Project.
M. Seal all points of conduit entry into fiberglass cable-pulling enclosures for a waterproof installation.
N. Support outlet boxes for incandescent fixtures and other ceiling-mounted devices in lay-in acoustical tile ceilings by bar hangers anchored to ceiling construction members which do not interfere with tile removal.
END OF SECTION 26 0533
533
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0534 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install conduits as required, and as shown on the Plans. Materials employed shall be as shown on the Plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer part number, model number, material, size, and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the ENGINEER has reviewed the submittal data.
B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit and any related work.
C. Proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs-on-grade.
D. Identify conduit by tag number of equipment served or by circuit schedule number.
E. Proposed routing and details of construction including conduit and rebar embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. Identify conduit by tag number of equipment served or by circuit schedule number.
F. Proposed location and details of construction for openings in slabs and walls for raceway runs.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit.
B. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. RN-1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Metal Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
2. TC-2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. 1, Flexible Metal Conduit.
2. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.
3. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
4. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
5. 514C, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers.
6. 651, Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings.
7. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.
8. 884, Underfloor Raceways and Fittings.
9. 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Exposed conduit in an unclassified or hazardous area shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS) unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Plans. Exposed conduits in a wet or corrosive area shall be PVC coated GRS unless otherwise indicated. Underground and/or concrete encased conduits shall be PVC, unless otherwise indicated. All wiring, except as otherwise noted, shall be in conduit.
Conduit size shall not be less than the National Electrical Code (NEC) size required for the conductors therein and shall not be smaller than 3/4-inch. No underground conduit shall be less than one inch.
B. Condulet type fittings shall be Form 8, Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or ENGINEER-approved equal with gasketed covers. All condulets located outdoors or in wet locations shall be weathertight. 534
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0534 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. In unclassified areas, flexible conduit shall be grounding type, weatherproof, corrosion resistant, and watertight. If indicated on the plans, liquidtight flexible conduit shall have an external bonding jumper. Connectors shall be as manufactured by OZ-Gedney, Type 4Q-L, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
D. Couplings, connectors, and fittings shall be standard types specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose. They shall be installed to provide a firm mechanical assembly and electrical conductivity throughout.
E. Expansion fittings shall be OZ type AX with jumper for exposed locations and type DX at structural expansion joints, Spring City, or ENGINEER-approved equal. Conduits shall have expansion fittings in accordance with NEC.
F. The conduits and fittings shall be supported per NEC requirements as a minimum.
2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL (GRS)
A. Conduit and couplings shall be hot-dipped galvanized with zinc coated threads and outer coating of zinc bichromate, in accordance with ANSI C80.1 standards, as manufactured by Jones & Laughlin Steel Corporation, Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation, Triangle PWC, Republic, Youngstown, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
B. Steel conduit shall not be buried in earth without concrete encasement and additional corrosion protection. A half lapped rapping of 20 mil PVC based corrosion protection tape shall be used.
2.3 PVC COATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL (PVC-GRS)
A. PVC coated GRS conduit shall be installed outdoors, in wet locations, corrosive locations, where shown on the Plans or elsewhere specified and shall conform to NEMA RN-1 and ANSI C80.1 standards.
B. The zinc surface of the conduit shall remain intact and undisturbed on both the inside and the outside of the conduit throughout the preparation and application processing. A Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the plastic. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be a minimum of 0.040-inch (40 mil).
C. A loose coupling shall be furnished with each length of conduit. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of the coupling and a PVC sleeve equal to the outside diameter of the uncoated conduit shall extend beyond both ends of the coupling approximately one pipe diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is smaller. The wall thickness of the coating on the coupling and the sleeve shall be a minimum of 0.055-inch (55 mil).
D. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the inner and outer surface of all conduit bodies and fittings and a PVC sleeve shall extend from all hubs. The wall thickness of the coating on conduit bodies and fittings and the sleeve walls shall be identical to those on couplings in length and thickness. The covers on all conduit bodies shall be coated on both sides and shall be designed to be completely interchangeable. The inside of conduit bodies shall remain undisturbed in the processing.
E. Type 316 stainless steel screws shall be furnished and used to attach the cover to the conduit body.
All coated material shall be installed and patched according to the manufacturer's recommended installation and patching instructions.
F. Conduit straps shall be PVC coated or 316 stainless steel.
G. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Plasti-Bond, Perma-Cote, Occidental Coating Company, Kor Kap, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
H. PVC coated flexible conduits shall be liquid and vaportight and manufactured in accordance with UL 360 standards.
535
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0534 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
2.4 RIGID NONMETALLIC - PVC
A. Where specifically indicated on the Plans, or elsewhere specified, conduit may be high density Schedule 40, 90 degrees C, heavy-duty PVC. The conduit shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound which meets ASTM D1784, NEMA TC-2, and UL 651 standards.
Smoke emissions shall be limited to less than 6 grams per 100 grams of material tested.
B. Where conduit concrete encasement is indicated on the Plans, conduit supports shall be installed at five-foot intervals. PVC conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon, Triangle Conduit & Cable, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
2.5 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be liquid and vaportight, oil and ultraviolet ray resistant and manufactured in accordance with UL 360 standards. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be formed of a continuous, spiral wound, galvanized steel core with an extruded PVC jacket. The PVC jacket shall be rated for high ambient heat applications, 90°Celsius.
B. For corrosive locations, liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be formed of a continuous, spiral wound, aluminum core with an extruded PVC jacket. The PVC jacket shall be impervious to corrosive liquids and vapors.
C. An external bonding conductor shall be required for all flexible conduit connections Flexible conduit and connectors shall be listed for grounding.
D. Connectors for liquidtight flexible conduit shall be galvanized, furnished with a sealing ring and locknut, and suitable for wet locations.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit runs are schematic only, and shall be modified as required to suit field conditions, subject to review and acceptance by the ENGINEER.
B. Conduit shall run continuously between outlets and shall be provided with junction boxes where connections are made. Couplings, connectors, and fittings shall be acceptable types designed and manufactured for the purpose, and shall provide a firm mechanical assembly, and electrical conductivity throughout.
C. Conduit runs shall be straight and true. Elbows, offsets, and bends shall be uniform and symmetrical. Changes in direction shall be made with long radius bends, or with fittings of the condulet type.
D. Conduit runs in buildings and structures shall be exposed except as specifically noted, or accepted by the ENGINEER.
E. Conduit runs shall not interfere with the proper and safe operation of equipment, and shall not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches.
F. Exposed conduits shall be securely fastened with clamps, or straps, intended for conduit use. All exposed conduit shall be run on the walls and ceiling only and shall be parallel to the planes of the walls or ceiling. No diagonal runs will be permitted. Flexible conduit shall be used only for short lengths required to facilitate connections between rigid conduit to motors from junction boxes, or control equipment. The maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 3 feet.
G. Conduit runs on water-bearing walls shall be supported one inch away from the wall on an accepted channel. When channel galvanizing, or other coating, is cut or otherwise damaged, it shall be field coated to original condition. No conduit shall be run in water-bearing walls, unless specifically designated otherwise.
536
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0534 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
H. Conduit shall be thoroughly reamed to remove burrs. GRS shall be reamed during the threading process, and Rigid Nonmetallic PVC shall be reamed before applying fittings. A zinc rich cold galvanizing shall be used to restore corrosion protection on field cut threads. Bushings and lock nuts or hubs shall be used at conduit terminations. The total number of bends in any run between pull points shall not exceed 360 degrees. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be installed at points acceptable to the ENGINEER. Conduit ends shall be plugged to prevent the entrance of moisture or debris during construction. All spare conduits shall be adequately capped and shall contain a suitable pull string.
I. Joints shall be set up tight. Hangers and fastenings shall be secure, and of a type appropriate in design, and dimensions, for the particular application.
J. Conduit runs shall be cleaned and internally sized (obstruction tested) so that no foreign objects, or obstructions remain in the conduit prior to pulling in conductors.
K. After installation of complete conduit runs 2 inches and larger, conduits shall be snaked with a conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of the nominal diameter of the conduit. Conduits through which the mandrel will not pass shall not be used.
L. Expansion fittings shall be installed across all expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
M. Provide trenching, backfill, and compaction for conduits installed underground.
N. Each conduit shall be provided with tags as specified on the plan details or with stainless steel identification tags affixed by means of stainless steel wire to the conduit’s termination bushing.
The minimum size of the identification tags shall be ¾-inch X 2-inch. The identification tag shall be embossed with the conduit number shown in the Design Plans. The letters and numbers on the tags shall, as a minimum, be 1/4"-inch high.
END OF SECTION 26 0534
537
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 - 1 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conduit
2. Elbows
3. Spacers
4. Conduit Termination in Manholes and Buildings
5. Plugs
6. Pull Tape
7. Grounding
8. Drainage Assembly
9. Concrete Encasement
10. Reinforcing Steel
11. Underground Warning Tape
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 00 - General Conditions
2. Division 01 - General Requirements
3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
5. Section 26 0534 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
6. Section 26 0544 - Manholes
7. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Refer to Section 26 0000 – General Electrical Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include duct bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.
2. Include duct, conduits, and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement.
3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures.
4. Include underground-line warning tape.
5. Include warning planks.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.
2. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
3. Include reinforcement details.
4. Include grounding details.
5. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract Documents.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: For duct and duct bank. Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.
538
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 - 2 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
. CONTRACTOR shall include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products are acceptable:
1. Conduit:
a. Size: 2 inches minimum unless noted otherwise on drawings. b. Material: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) marked at uniform intervals to indicate the kind of material; type Schedule 40 heavy wall, type EB-20 (TC-6), or type EB-35 (TC8). Type EB conduit is rated for use only in concrete encased applications.
2. Elbows:
a. Elbows shall be PVC coated galvanized rigid steel (GRS) with coupling adapters from PVC to PVC coated GRS.
3. Spacers:
a. Plastic, to maintain minimum 3 inches spacing between conduits and minimum 7.5 inches between conduits on-center.
4. Conduit Termination in Manholes and Buildings:
a. Bell Ends: Manufactured bell ends of appropriate sizes at each end of conduit. When entering a new building or a new manhole, a pre-manufactured PVC bell end system (as manufactured by Formex or similar) with conduit seals, provisions for roughing into the concrete, and water stops is allowed.
b. Seals: When entering an existing building or manhole below grade, the concrete shall be core drilled for the appropriate size conduit and seal. The seal shall be a mechanical interlocking assembly of modular rubber links properly sized to fit the pipe and tightened in place, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. c. Bushings: Steel grounding bushings shall be used on all metal conduits entering a building or manhole.
5. Plugs:
a. Expandable pipe plug, gas- and water-tight, for sealing empty conduit. Plug shall be high impact plastic with an outer rubber gasket expandable by hand tightening a wing nut on a central spindle.
6. Pull Tape:
a. Polyester pull tape, ½ inch width, tensile strength of 1,250 lbs. with sequential footage markings along the entire length of the tape as manufactured by Greenlee, Carlon, Garvin Industries, or Neptco (Muletape). Install pull tape in each empty conduit.
7. Grounding:
a. Steel grounding bushings shall be grounded to manhole or junction box ground.
8. Drainage Assembly:
a. All ducts shall drain to an open end – preferably a manhole.
9. Concrete Encasement:
a. Concrete used throughout shall be ready mixed concrete furnished by an approved mixing plant. The plant shall comply with the requirements of National Ready Mixed Concrete Association certification plan.
b. The concrete mix used with type Schedule 40 heavy wall conduit shall be 3000 psi minimum, 3/4 inch aggregate.
539
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 - 3 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
c. The concrete mix used with type EB-20 (TC-6), or type EB-35 (TC-8) thin wall conduit shall be 2500 psi minimum, 3/8 inch pea gravel aggregate. d. The slump shall be just enough to allow the mix to flow to the bottom of the formation and yet not be so wet as to cause the ducts to float.
e. Encase duct with 3 inches minimum of concrete on top, bottom, and sides with top of duct bank troweled to a smooth crown to prevent pooling of water.
10. Reinforcing Steel:
a. Provide reinforcing steel the entire length of the duct system, four - #4 bars - one in each corner, minimum, or as shown on the drawings. Tie or dowel the reinforcement steel into the connecting walls of manholes, vaults and buildings, etc. to protect against vertical shearing.
11. Underground Warning Tape:
a. Detectable underground warning tape, 6 inches wide minimum, 4.5 mil thickness, containing a foil core as manufactured by Presco, Seton, or similar.
Tape color and labeling shall be as follows:
Red color with black letters. Labeled with the words:
“CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATIONS
A. Excavate trenches for duct bank to adequate width, depth, and proper slope as specified.
B. Install forms on sides of duct bank if trench is not proper firmness to prevent cave-in.
C. The trench sidewall shall be less than 6 inches from the edge of the conduit being installed. Install forms if needed to limit the trench width.
D. Bottom of trench shall be undisturbed earth. If trench bottom is too low for proper grade, fill to proper level with sand and mechanically compact it.
E. Each excavated section from manhole to manhole and from manhole to building shall be completely excavated and graded before any duct is laid in that section.
3.2 PLACEMENT OF CONDUIT
A. Install flush bell ends on duct at manholes and buildings. When entering a new building or a new manhole, a pre-manufacture end bell system (by Formex or similar) with conduit seals is allowed.
B. When entering an existing building or manhole, core drill existing walls and waterproof using a mechanical seal of assembled rubber links properly sized for the pipe and tighten in place, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction, after the new conduit is installed.
C. Install spacers as recommended by conduit manufacturer and requirements stated above, but not to exceed a maximum of 6 ft-0 inches on center for PVC conduit and 8 ft-0 inches on center for steel conduit. Bottom spacers shall rest on 8" X 16" X 2" concrete pads to prevent them from sinking into the ground and reducing the bottom concrete cover. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum horizontally.
D. Tie the conduit assembly down at regular intervals so it does float up in the concrete during the pour.
E. Pitch conduit properly for drainage to manhole and to prevent low pockets or irregular dips between conduit ends. Pitch conduit away from building and toward manhole. Minimum pitch to be 4 inches per 100 feet.
540
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 - 4 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Install not more than one 90-degree bend or equivalent between manholes for primary conduit and two 90-degree bends or equivalent for signal conduit.
G. In duct banks with both primary and signal conduit, primary conduit shall be straight and the signal conduit shall contain bends as necessary to accommodate the primary duct.
H. Install insulated grounding bushings on steel duct ends.
I. Install closure plugs in all empty conduits at manhole and building entrances and at terminations in equipment pedestals to prevent the entrance of water, sediment and vapors.
3.3 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING BARS
A. At new building and manhole walls, tie duct bank and wall reinforcing steel together to provide a permanent connection.
B. At existing building and manhole walls, dowel reinforcement bar into the wall to provide protection against vertical shearing. Use epoxy adhesive to secure the dowels.
C. Install the bars - one in each corner, minimum or as shown on the drawings, overlap the joints 12 inches and tie into the connecting walls of manholes, vaults, and buildings, etc.
3.4 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE
A. The Contractor shall supervise the placement of concrete in the duct bank.
B. Complete entire section of conduit from manhole to manhole or from manhole to building before encasement by concrete.
C. Top of concrete envelopes shall be not less than 24 inches below grade.
D. In placing concrete around the conduit, adjust delivery chute so the fall of the concrete into the trench is minimal.
E. Vibrating is not allowed as it tends to cause the conduit to float up in the concrete.
F. Provide minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover over conduit at the top, bottom and sides with top of duct bank troweled to a smooth crown to prevent pooling of water.
G. Place concrete continuously from manhole to manhole to building without interruption.
H. Extend concrete envelope to finish floor grade or interior wall surface in buildings and finish pad grade at equipment. Maintain moisture seal.
3.5 BACKFILL
A. Compact backfill around duct bank.
B. Install warning tape 12 inches below finish grade over all duct banks. For duct banks more than 24 inches wide, install multiple runs of warning tape no farther than 18 inches apart. The warning tape shall not be farther than 12 inches from the duct bank edge.
3.6 RESTORATION
A. After completion of duct bank installation, return all ground and pavement surfaces to original condition or to condition as indicated on the drawings. This includes all sidewalks, curbs, streets, parking areas, lawns, plantings, etc.
3.7 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Pull a mandrel/swab (diameter ¼-inch smaller than conduit) through each conduit in completed duct bank to insure adequate opening of duct run.
B. Install pull tape with measurement markings in each empty duct.
C. Install closure plugs in all empty conduits at manhole and building entrances and at terminations in equipment pedestals to prevent the entrance of water, sediment and vapors. 541
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 - 5 B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
D. Ground all steel bushings to manhole or junction box ground.
END OF SECTION 26 0543
542
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Electrical identification work specified in this Section covers the following:
1. Buried cable warnings
2. Electrical power, control and communication conductors
3. Operational instructions and warnings
4. Danger signs
5. Equipment/system identification signs
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals to the ENGINEER shall include the following:
1. Manufacturers data on electrical identification materials and products
2. Samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system
1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical identification products maybe incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Brady, W.H. Co.
2. Ideal Industries, Inc.
3. Panduit Corp.
4. or ENGINEER-approved equal
1.4 QUALITY COMPLIANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems, pertaining to electrical identification systems.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.
2.2 COLOR CODED CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap-on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering that indicates voltage of conductor{s} in conduit. Provide 8" minimum length for 2" and smaller conduit, 12" length for larger conduit.
B. Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white markers with black letters.
2.3 CABLE AND CONDUCTOR WIRE MARKERS
A. Cable and conductor wire markers shall be self-laminating vinyl on white background, printed using a Brady TLS2200 printer, Seton printer, or ENGINEER-approved equal. Handwritten wire markers are not acceptable.
2.4 SELF-ADHESIVE PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive or pressure-sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g., 208V, EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER. 543
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white signs with black lettering.
2.5 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC.
B. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of painting.
C. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work.
3.2 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping that is identified by a color-coded method, apply color-coded identification on electrical conduit in manner similar to piping identification. Except as otherwise indicated, use white as coded color for conduit.
3.3 CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A. Apply cable conductor identification, including voltage, phase and feeder number, on each cable conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.
3.4 EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication-control-signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:
1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures
2. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities
3. Major electrical switchgear.
B. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with brass or stainless steel screws, except use adhesive where screws should not or cannot penetrate the substrate.
3.5 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. The 3-phase wires shall be identified at the switchgear, panelboards and motor control centers as Phases A, B, and C. At 277/480V, Phase A shall be brown, Phase B shall be orange, and Phase C shall be yellow. The neutral shall be gray.
544
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. In addition to color coding all conductors, each conductor shall be identified in each pull box, manhole, panelboard, cable tray, or termination with circuit identification markers. This identification is applicable to all power, control, alarm, and instrumentation conductors and these markings shall be recorded on the Record Documents. Markers shall be slip-on PVC sleeve type as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Markers for other cabling shall be B-292 vinyl as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or ENGINEERapproved equal.
D. Exposed medium voltage conduits shall be labeled at 50-foot intervals with 1-inch letters stating the voltage; for example, "12,470 volts". Labels shall be vinyl plastic as manufactured by Brady, Seton, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
3.6 AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent warning signs shall be mounted at all mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations. Signs shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations and shall be suitable for exterior use. The warning signs shall be fastened with round head brass screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
B. Warning signs shall be 7 inches high by 10 inches wide, colored yellow and black, on not less than 18 gauge vitreous enameling stock. Sign shall read:
CAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS
AUTOMATICALLY
BY REMOTE CONTROL
3.7 HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING SIGNS
A. Permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be mounted on all equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, where the voltage exceeds 600 volts.
B. Signs shall be in accordance with OSHA regulation, and shall be suitable for exterior use. The warning signs shall be fastened with round head brass screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
C. Signs shall be 7 inches high by 10 inches wide, colored red and white, on not less than 18 gauge vitreous enameling stock. Sign shall read:
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
KEEP OUT
3.8 CONDUCTOR FASTENERS
A. Glue-on type conductor fasteners shall not be used in any panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, or other enclosures containing electrical devices and/or conductors.
END OF SECTION 26 0553
545
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0573.13 – SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY/ARC FLASH HAZARD
ANALYSIS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The contractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies which shall be prepared by the equipment manufacturer.
B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.5 and Informative Annex D.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
3. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis
4. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings
5. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
6. IEEE 1584 – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers
2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed SinglePole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories
5. ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of a Sinusoidal Current Wave and Normal-Frequency Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of Fault Currents C. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, latest edition
2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A. The short-circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be submitted to the design engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment drawings for manufacturing. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from the engineer may be obtained for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device and characteristics will be satisfactory.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. No more than five (5) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. For large system studies, submittals requiring more than five (5) copies of the report will be provided without the section containing the computer printout of the shortcircuit input and output data. Additional copies, where required, shall be provided on CD in PDF format.
546
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. The report shall include the following sections:
1. One-line diagram showing protective device ampere ratings and associated designations, cable size & lengths, transformer kVA & voltage ratings, motor & generator kVA ratings, and switchgear/switchboard/panelboard designations
2. Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope of the study
3. Tabulations of the worst-case calculated short circuit duties as a percentage of the applied device rating (automatic transfer switches, circuit breakers, fuses, etc.); the short circuit duties shall be upward-adjusted for X/R ratios that are above the device design ratings
4. Protective device time versus current coordination curves with associated one-line diagram identifying the plotted devices, tabulations of ANSI protective relay functions and adjustable circuit breaker trip unit settings
5. Multi-function relay setting file printouts including all ANSI protective relay functions and associated logic and control. Metering, communication, and control logic settings not associated with ANSI protective functions are not required.
6. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout
7. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations
8. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed
9. Executive Summary including source of information and assumptions made
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be conducted under the supervision and approval of a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be a full-time employee of the Engineering Services Organization.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 STUDIES
A. Contractor to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as prepared by equipment manufacturer. By using the equipment manufacturer, the study allows coordination of proper breakers, fuses, and current transformers. The coordination study shall begin with the utility company's feeder protective device and include all of the electrical protective devices down to and include the largest feeder circuit breaker and motor starter in the 480-volt motor control centers and power distribution panelboards. The study shall also include variable frequency drives, harmonic filters, power factor correction equipment, transformers and protective devices associated with variable frequency drives, emergency and standby generators associated paralleling equipment and distribution switchgear.
B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.5 and Informative Annex D.
2.2 DATA COLLECTION
A. Contractor shall furnish all field data as required by the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract.
The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing.
B. Source combination may include present and future utility supplies, motors, and generators.
C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided by Owner or Contractor.
547
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors < 50 hp grouped together.
The Contractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study requirements.
2.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE Standards 141, latest edition.
B. Transformer design impedances and standard X/R ratios shall be used when test values are not available.
C. Provide the following:
1. Calculation methods and assumptions
2. Selected base per unit quantities
3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated with available fault at each bus, and interrupting rating of devices noted
4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics
5. Typical calculations
6. Tabulations of calculated quantities
7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations
D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each:
1. Electric utility’s supply termination point
2. Incoming switchgear
3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals
4. Low voltage switchgear
5. Motor control centers
6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches
7. Branch circuit panelboards
8. Other significant locations throughout the system
E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
F. Protective Device Evaluation:
1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings
2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bracing to withstand short-circuit stresses
3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses
4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating
5. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current
2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on loglog scale paper.
B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered.
C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.
D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
548
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable:
1. Electric utility’s protective device
2. Medium voltage equipment relays
3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands
4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands
5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer withstand parameters
6. Conductor damage curves
7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable
8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points
9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point
10. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center
F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection.
G. Select each primary protective device required for a delta-wye connected transformer so that the characteristics or operating band is within the transformer parameters which includes a parameter equivalent to 58% of the ANSI withstand point to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults.
H. Separate low voltage power circuit breakers from each other and the associated primary protective device by a 16% current margin for coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-toline faults.
I. Engineer shall provide settings file printouts for all multifunction relays supplied under this contract including all ANSI protective relay functions and associated logic and control. Metering, communication, and control logic settings not associated with ANSI protective functions are not required.
2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2012, Informative Annex D.
B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal.
C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.
D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all MV, 575V, & 480V locations and significant locations in 240-volt and 208-volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 125 kVA.
E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.
G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary.
549
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.
Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 Section B.1.2.
2.6 REPORT SECTIONS
A. Input Data:
1. Utility three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with associated X/R ratios
2. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines with associated X/R ratios
3. Cable type, construction, size, # per phase, length, impedance, and conduit type
4. Bus duct type, size, length, and impedance
5. Transformer primary & secondary voltages, winding configurations, kVA rating, impedance, and X/R ratio
6. Reactor inductance and continuous ampere rating
7. Aerial line type, construction, conductor spacing, size, # per phase, and length B. Short-Circuit Data:
1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions
2. X to R ratios
3. Asymmetry factors
4. Motor contributions
5. Short circuit kVA
6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents
C. Recommended Protective Device Settings:
1. Phase and Ground Relays:
a. Current transformer ratio.
b. Current setting.
c. Time setting.
d. Instantaneous setting.
e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings.
f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.
2. Circuit Breakers:
a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). b. Adjustable time-current characteristic.
c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.
D. Incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations.
1. Arcing fault magnitude
2. Device clearing time
3. Duration of arc
4. Arc flash boundary
5. Working distance
6. Incident energy
7. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.
550
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDIES/ARC FLASH 26 0573 - 6
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
C. Notify Owner in writing of any required major equipment modifications.
D. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the field engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall be provided on all components manufactured by the engineering service parent manufacturing company.
3.2 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. The vendor shall provide a 4 in. x 4 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.
B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, SHOCK & ARC FLASH HAZARD”, and shall include the following information:
1. Location designation
2. Nominal voltage
3. Arc flash boundary
4. Incident energy
5. Working distance
6. Shock Boundaries
7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings.
1. For each 600-, 480-, and applicable 208-volt panelboards and disconnects, one arc flash label shall be provided
2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided
3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided
4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided
5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
3.3 ARC FLASH TRAINING
A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals. The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET).
END OF SECTION 26 0573.13
551
TERMINAL BLOCKS 26 0583 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0583 TERMINAL BLOCKS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section covers terminal blocks for control and other wiring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to installation.
1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Terminal blocks shall be Entrelec, Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
B. Surge protection blocks shall be TELEMATIC, series SD, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
C. Power distribution blocks shall be Ilsco Corporation, or ENGINEER-approved equal.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Terminal blocks shall mount on standard DIN rail, and be of the size required for conductors therein. A minimum of 25 percent spares shall be provided in each terminal box. No more than 2 conductors shall be allowed per termination. Jumper bar assemblies shall be installed for interconnecting terminal blocks, distributing power and signal commons. Terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 30 Amps, minimum.
B. Grounding terminal blocks shall be provided for instrumentation cable shields. The terminal blocks shall have distinctive 2-color bodies, and shall be mounted to the DIN rail with metal screw down type clamps, providing a positive ground connection. One grounding terminal block shall be installed for every 2 instrument cables terminated. Grounding terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 20 Amps, minimum.
C. Terminal blocks shall be available in a variety of colors, including red, green, blue, gray, black, yellow, and orange.
D. DIN mount fuse holders shall have blown fuse indicators for DC and AC circuits. Fuse holders shall be of the compression clamp type. Fuse holders shall be U.L. listed, and rated for 600 Volts.
Fuse sizes shall not exceed the U.L. current rating for the fuse holders.
E. DIN rail shall be prepunched, zinc bichromate plated steel. Symmetrical DIN rail shall be 35mmX7.5mm, minimum.
F. Terminal blocks for 4 to 20 milliamp signals shall have knife disconnect switches, and accessible test points for testing and measurement of current loop signals, without the need for removing wire terminations.
2.2 SURGE PROTECTION BLOCKS (SPB)
A. Analog inputs and outputs shall be terminated at surge protection blocks (SPB). The SPBs shall be designed for a working voltage of 32 volts, and shall be fused.
B. SPBs shall provide full hybrid line to line protection, and shall have a GDT rating of 10,000 A (8/20µs pulse waveform).
C. SPBs shall be UL94 V-2 listed.
2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (PDB)
A. PDBs shall be Electro tin plated and manufactured from high strength 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. 552
TERMINAL BLOCKS 26 0583 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
B. PDBs shall be UL Recognized, rated 90° C, and CSA Certified.
C. PDBs shall provide flexibility in using the connector as an in line splice or to reduce conductor size for taps.
D. PDBs shall be rated for 600 Volts and dual rated for Copper and Aluminum Conductors.
E. PDBs shall have the sizes and ratings as shown on the Plans.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Each terminal block and fuse holder shall be identified with the circuit number, or conductor number, corresponding to the identification appearing on the shop Drawings for the equipment, or system.
B. Terminal block and fuse holder markers shall be computer printed plastic-type, with permanent markings.
C. End clamps and end sections shall be installed on each terminal block and fuse holder assembly.
D. Terminal blocks for DC voltages shall be blue, and AC voltages shall be gray.
END OF SECTION 26 0583
553
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 0800 - 1
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
SECTION 26 0800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of equipment and system start-up to OWNER and ENGINEER.
B. Results of Vendor’s shop and field tests.
C. Qualifications of the independent testing agency (if used) (reference paragraph 3.03 herein).
D. Required documentation as required by Code, the AHJ, and listed within the Contract Documents and herein.
E. Equipment and instrumentation calibration certification or documentation for all test instruments.
F. Documentation that the vendor’s storage and handling requirements were met for all equipment and materials.
G. Equipment Vendor’s Recommendations for:
1. Alignment Tolerances
2. Allowable Vibration Levels
3. Lubrication Requirements
4. Cleaning Procedures
H. Observed Installation Data:
1. Alignment Readings
2. Operating Vibration Levels
3. Test and Inspection Reports
I. At completion of Work, CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER certification that equipment has been tested and commissioned and is in operating condition in accordance with contract documents.
J. Final Reports: Provide final reports to ENGINEER for review.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing of the electrical equipment and systems shall comply with "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" by the International Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
B. CONTRACTOR shall perform specified services with qualified personnel, or employ and pay for qualified organization to perform specified services. The personnel performing the testing shall be certified by a national organization, with a minimum of five years’ experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical equipment, systems and devices. Information on the certified personnel shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to the start of work.
C. CONTRACTOR shall provide calibrated instruments required for commissioning and testing operations.
1. Make personnel and instruments available to ENGINEER to facilitate spot checks during testing.
2. Retain possession of instruments; remove from Site at completion of services.
D. Furnish material, tools, and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of equipment, instrument and system.
E. Coordinate the startup of equipment and systems with existing operations or facility equipment so that it does not affect OWNER’s operations.
554
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 0800 - 2
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Provide equipment vendor’s authorized service representative to inspect and approve installation where required in individual Specification Sections.
G. Comply strictly with specified vendor’s, ENGINEER’s, and OWNER’s procedures in starting up and commissioning specified systems.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate startup, testing, and commissioning services to ensure rapid completion of services.
B. Promptly report to ENGINEER and OWNER any deficiencies noted during performance of commissioning and testing services.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Prior to start of testing and commissioning, verify that required "job conditions" are met:
1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation.
2. Ambient conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditions.
3. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic equipment are in full operation.
B. Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and commissioning have been met for elements of each of systems that require testing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT CLEANING
A. When no longer required, CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean equipment of temporary protective coatings and foreign materials.
B. CONTRACTOR shall perform cleaning procedures recommended by equipment vendor and as outlined in Specifications Sections.
3.2 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall inspect equipment installations and verify, in writing, status of work meets requirements for starting equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Compare equipment nameplate information, including breaker sizes, etc. with latest drawings and documents and report discrepancies to ENGINEER.
2. Check for proper mounting, anchorage, required clearances, physical damage, and alignment.
3. Lubrication type, quantity, and date installed.
4. Torque test cable mechanical connections to vendor’s recommended torque values with a calibrated torque wrench. In the absence of vendor data, refer to UL 486 for torque values.
5. Proper drive rotation before connecting coupling, belts, or chains.
6. Exercise all active components.
7. Ensure that all shipping brackets and appurtenances have been removed.
8. Ensure that all resilient mounts are free.
9. Check out of wiring and control systems for proper terminations and continuity.
10. Verify proper equipment grounding.
11. Verify proper motor and electric device voltage ratings.
12. Control systems operational.
13. Auxiliary services connected, i.e., alarm and trip circuits, and safety devices.
14. Instrumentation calibrated.
15. Verify wiring terminations are complete and breaker/fuse size matches the requirements shown on the drawings.
555
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 0800 - 3
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
16. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the electrical contractor installs all rough-in boxes and associated conduit and boxes as shown on the drawings by marking on a set of drawings.
17. Ensure that all conductors and boxes and cabinets, devices, etc., are labeled per the project specifications.
B. ENGINEER and OWNER reserve right to witness all CONTRACTOR's inspections.
CONTRACTOR shall invite ENGINEER and OWNER for all testing sessions.
3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. General:
1. Check installation of equipment to confirm it is complete, including panels, doors, internal partitions, coatings, cover plates, etc.
2. Review factory test results for electrical equipment.
3. Perform the testing and startup required by the equipment vendor.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall hire an independent testing agent or utilize the equipment vendor to conduct operating and acceptance tests on new electrical system components and all existing devices which are impacted by the project. The following shall be tested: all service entrance equipment and main distribution equipment (not including panelboards or other items fed from it); generators and transfer switches, fire detection and alarm systems, and UPS systems greater than 45kVA.
1. The testing agent shall prepare written reports of values of all test readings and procedures.
Reports shall include all breaker settings and modifications to one-line and three-line drawings.
2. The testing agent shall furnish all equipment, instruments and personnel required to conduct tests.
3. Test will be defined in the individual section describing the equipment or system.
C. Wiring Systems:
1. Perform and record ground tests on all grounding conductors.
2. Check wiring identification at both ends of each circuit.
3. Perform continuity and insulation (megger) resistance testing of all feeders. Submit written test results to ENGINEER and OWNER as part of operation and maintenance data.
4. Each receptacle on the project shall be tested to ensure that it is labeled and all wiring installed properly with respect to ground, neutral and phase wire with a tester.
D. Grounding:
1. Perform field testing of ground resistance from service neutral connection to ground reference point. Maximum permitted resistance 0.5 ohms.
2. For ground rods, perform fall of potential test with results not greater than five (5) ohms.
CONTRACTOR shall add length to ground rods or add more ground rods and connections to meet requirement of five (5) ohms or less.
E. Motors:
1. Check rotation of motor in relation to marking on case; confirm that it matches the direction required by the driven equipment.
2. Measure motor amperage and compare to nameplate value.
3. Correct conditions that produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction.
4. Check bearing vibration levels to confirm that they are within vendor’s tolerances. Replace motors or bearings that operate with excessive vibration.
5. Compare overload element rating with motor full-load current rating to verify correct sizing.
6. Program motor protection relays with settings provided by ENGINEER, if applicable.
7. Confirm operation of RTDs for motors and transformers (status, alarm, trip), if applicable.
8. Verify operation of space heaters, if applicable.
556
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 0800 - 4
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN
F. Dry Type Transformers:
1. Verify proper core grounding.
2. Verify taps, if applicable, are connected to desired tap setting per ENGINEER.
3. Measure secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after final energization and prior to loading.
G. Switchboards:
1. Check bolt torque for bus sections.
2. Verify secondary voltage on control power transformers, potential transformers, (PTs) and current transformers (CTs).
3. Verify operation of space heaters, if applicable.
4. Verify fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings.
5. Program relays with settings provided by ENGINEER, if applicable.
6. Verify any mechanical and/or electrical interlocks function as intended in design.
7. Verify proper operation of ground fault relays.
8. Verify proper operation of TVSS units. Utilize equipment vendor’s representative if necessary.
9. Perform measurement of resistance of switchboard insulation after assembly is complete. Test voltage shall be 1,000V or as recommended by the equipment vendor. Acceptable minimum resistance shall be 100 megohms (all sections), phase-to-phase, and phase-to-ground with other phases grounded.
10. Provide ground fault testing in accordance with NETA ATS.
11. Provide infrared testing of main switchboard and panelboards six months after final acceptance.
H. Motor Control:
1. Verify that control sequences, time delay and adjustments are as indicated on documents.
2. Verify proper operation of motor starters, VFDs, and other motor control.
I. Panelboards:
1. Verify GFI and AFI type breakers function properly.
2. Verify TVSS units operate properly. Utilize equipment vendor’s representative if necessary.
3. Verify lockout devices are installed on fire alarm, kitchen hood, security, and telecom circuits.
4. Phase balance and show phase balancing to within 20 percent on the record drawings of completed panelboard installation.
J. Lighting:
1. Each luminaire shall be checked to ensure that all lamps are working and the luminaire(s) are controlled by a light switch. For any lighting control systems ensure that the controls work as specified and where a photocell is involved that works accordingly.
2. Test all interior lighting controls systems such as stage lighting to ensure that it works per the design requirements. Test operation, sensitivity and time out settings for all occupancy sensors.
Test daylight response photosensors and make to ensure lighting is being controlled per recommended light level settings.
K. Generator:
1. Perform generator tests for automatic transfer from primary power supply.
2. Verify alarm signals.
3. Provide for a full factory test and on-site test utilizing portable test load bank for minimum four (4) hours. Simulate power failure including operation for transfer switch, automatic starting, automatic shutdown and return to normal. This testing does not include commissioning.
Commissioning shall be performed after system is connected to the building electrical system.
L. Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Test transfer switches by means of simulated power outage; automatic startup by remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust transfer switch timers for proper system coordination.
557
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 0800 - 5
B810 ADELANTO WWTP IMPROVEMENT PLAN